Marine Plankton Diatoms of The Coast of North America
Marine Plankton Diatoms of The Coast of North America
Marine Plankton Diatoms of The Coast of North America
BY
EASTER E. CUPP
_____________
[CONTRIBUTION FROM THE SCRIPPS INSTITUTION OF OCEANOGRAPHY, NEW SERIES, No. 190]
PAGE
Introduction 1
General Discussion 2
Characteristics of Diatoms and Their Relationship to Other Classes of Algae 2
Structure of Diatoms 3
Frustule 3
Protoplast 13
Biology of Diatoms 16
Reproduction 16
Colony Formation and the Secretion of Mucus 20
Movement of Diatoms 20
Adaptations for Flotation 22
Occurrence and Distribution of Diatoms in the Ocean 22
Associations of Diatoms with Other Organisms 24
Physiology of Diatoms 26
Nutrition 26
Environmental Factors Limiting Phytoplankton Production and Populations 27
Importance of Diatoms as a Source of food in the Sea 29
Collection and Preparation of Diatoms for Examination 29
Preparation for Examination 30
Methods of Illustration 33
Classification 33
Key 34
Centricae 39
Pennatae 172
Literature Cited 209
Plates 223
Index to Genera and Species 235
MARINE PLANKTON DIATOMS OF THE WEST COAST OF
NORTH AMERICA
BY
EASTER E. CUPP
_________
INTRODUCTION
For more than twenty years, investigations have been conducted at the Scripps Institution of Oceanography
on the distribution and abundance of marine plankton diatoms at several stations along the Pacific coast from
Scotch Cap, Alaska, to La Jolla, California. Besides these regular series of collections, numerous short series
have been taken on cruises of the research vessel of the Scripps Institution, Navy vessels, and private yachts,
covering routes from Alaska to Callao, Peru, and in the Gulf of California. In the course of examining the
thousands of samples collected, many perplexing problems of identification of species have arisen. In an effort
to help solve some of these problems and to fill a need for a taxonomic paper on the plankton diatoms of our
region, a need evident from the many requests received at the Scripps Institution, the present paper has been
prepared.
Although the main emphasis has been placed on the pelagic diatoms found in waters off southern California,
pelagic species present along the Pacific coast from Alaska to the Canal Zone and in the Gulf of California, as
well as some littoral species frequently found in plankton collections, have been included. A small number of
species listed on the Scripps Institution records but not verified by the author have been omitted, and without
doubt some species have been overlooked. A serious attempt has been made to include a large number of
drawings of many species to show variations that commonly occur in size and structure, since much of the
confusion in quantitative enumeration arises because of the departure of species from their “typical” appearance
as sketched in the usual papers and books on the diatoms.
Synonyms have been omitted for the most part because of the availability of several excellent recent
publications (Boyer, 1926–1927; Hustedt, 1930–1937; Mills, 1933–1934). Only a brief general discussion
of the group as a whole has been included for the same reason. The aim has been to produce a usable manual
for the rapid and easy identification of species commonly found in plankton collections.
Statements concerning the distribution and abundance of species are based mainly upon the author’s
observations (Cupp, 1930, 1934, 1937; Cupp and Allen, 1938; and unpublished data) and those of Professor W.
E. Allen of the Scripps Institution of Oceanography (1922, 1923, 1924, 1927a, 1927b, 1927c, 1928a, 1928b,
1928c, 1929a, 1929b, 1930, 1933, 1934a, 1936, 1937, 1938, 1939; Allen and Lewis, 1927; and unpublished
records). Other helpful sources of information have been accounts published by Bigelow and Leslie (1930),
Gran and Angst (1931), and Phifer (1933) for this coast and by Lebour (1930) and Hustedt (1930–1937) for
general distribution and abundance.
1
GENERAL DISCUSSION
Chlorophyceae Chloromonadineae
Xanthophyceae Euglenineae
Chrysophyceae Phaeophyceae
Bacillariophyceae (diatoms) Rhodophyceae
Cryptophyceae Myxophyceae (Cyanophyceae)
Dinophyceae (Peridinieae)
There is evidence indicating a closer relationship between some of Fritsch’s classes. Grounds for regarding
Xanthophyceae (Heterokontae), Chrysophyceae,
2
3
and Bacillariophyceae as having originated from a common ancestry have been given. It has been proposed
to group them in the division Chrysophyta (Pascher, (1914), 1921, 1931). Pascher’s opinion was based
on a number of similarities—preponderance in all three classes of carotinoid yellow or brown pigments in
the chromatophores, the associated absence of starch and occurrence of oil as one of the usual products of
assimilation, and certain resemblances in the structure of the cell envelopes. Silica is deposited in the membrane
of all three classes. These facts may well indicate a significant physiological relationship.
The diatoms form a highly specialized class, and although the points of similarity to the Xanthophyceae and
the Chrysophyceae are significant the absence of any clear connecting forms makes it seem most logical to
follow Fritsch at the present time and leave the Bacillariophyceae as a separate class of algae.
STRUCTURE OF DIATOMS
FRUSTULE
Mangin (1908) described the cell walls of diatoms as composed of pectin impregnated throughout with silica
except for an outer often mucilaginous portion, found especially in plankton diatoms, consisting of pectin
only and frequently visible by slight staining with anilin dyes. The silica can be extracted by the action of
hydrofluoric acid, leaving the soft organic pectin membrane, or the pectin can be removed by calcination or
maceration, leaving only the siliceous constituent.
Liebisch (1928, 1929) showed, however, that in many forms, perhaps in all, there is no interpenetration of
the silica and pectin. The diverse parts of the diatom membrane, according to his interpretation, consist of an
inner pectin layer and an outer layer probably of hydrated silica, similar to opal and without any admixture
of organic material. The inner layer is closely applied to the outer and consequently shows the impressions
of all the markings found on the siliceous shell. In the coarser forms the pectin layer is often thicker than the
siliceous one, whereas in thin-walled plankton diatoms it may be very hard to recognize.
The individual diatom cell, the frustule, possesses a characteristic cell wall in that it always consists of four
or more segments, the two largest of which, the valves, are exactly opposite each other (figs. A and B, vs1, vs2).
The edges of the valves are always bent at right angles to the valve face to form a flange. When an appreciable
part of the edge of the valve is bent over and is consequently seen from the girdle view, this part of the valve
is known as the valve mantle (fig. A, 1, vm1, vm2; fig. B, 1 and 3, vm1, vm2). Closely united to the flange or
valve mantle of each valve is a connecting band or girdle band (fig. A, 1, cb1, cb2; fig. B, 1 and 3, cb1, cb2).
The wall of the diatom consequently consists of two halves, each half made up of a valve and a connecting
band. The two connecting bands together form the girdle (fig. A, 1, g; fig. B, 1 and and 3, g). The connecting
bands are not closed hoops. Each band is a two-ended
4
Fig. A. Diagrammatic representation of a diatom frustule of the Centricae type (Coscinodiscus): (1)
girdle view; (2) valve view. Axes: P, pervalvar axis; D, diameter. Structure: e, epivalve; h, hypovalve;
cb1, connecting band of epivalve; cb2, connecting band of hypovalve; g, girdle; vs1, valve surface of
epivalve; vs2, valve surface of hypovalve; vm1, valve mantle of epivalve; vm2, valve mantle of hypovalve.
5
Fig. B (see opposite page). Diagrammatic representation of a diatom frustule of the Pennatae type
(Naviculoideae): (1) broad girdle view; (2) valve view; (3) transverse section (narrow girdle view). Axes:
A, apical axis; P, pervalvar axis; T, transapical axis. Structure: e, epivalve; h, hypovalve; cb1, connecting
band of epivalve; cb2, connecting band of hypovalve; g, girdle; tn, terminal nodule; cn, central nodule;
cp, central pore; r1, raphe of epivalve; r2, raphe of hypovalve; tf, terminal fissure or polar cleft; f, funnel-
shaped body; aa, axial or longitudinal area; ca, central area; vs1, valve surface of epivalve; vs2, valve
surface of hypovalve; vm1, valve mantle of epivalve; vm2, valve mantle of hypovalve; c, costae; of, outer
fissure of raphe; if, inner fissure of raphe.
6
strip with overlapping ends. Because of the method of cell division, one valve of the cell is older than the other
and is very slightly larger. The older valve is known as the epivalve or epitheca (fig. A, 1, e; fig. B, 1 and 3, e),
the younger valve as the hypovalve or hypotheca (fig. A, 1, h; fig. B, 1 and 3, h). The connecting band of the
older, larger valve fits over the connecting band of the younger, smaller valve like the lid of a box. The valves
correspond to the top and the bottom of a box, the connecting bands to the sides. Between the valve and the
connecting band one or more ringlike or scalelike intermediate bands, the intercalary bands (fig. C, 1–9, ib),
may occur. These bands are really secondary connecting bands and are usually easily seen in girdle view. Like
the connecting bands, the intercalary bands are in many forms only imperfectly closed hoops. The openings in
adjacent bands are not in the same line and are always covered by some portion of a neighboring band.
The axis through the center point of the two valves is the pervalvar or cell axis (fig. A, 1, P; fig. B, 1 and
3, P; fig. C, 1 and 9, P; fig. D, 1, P; fig. E, 4, P). The longitudinal axis of the valve is called the apical axis
(fig. B, 1 and 2, A); the transverse axis of the valve, the transapical axis (fig. B, 2 and 3, T). The length of the
cell is the distance along the pervalvar or cell axis from valve to valve; the breadth or width, the diameter or
the distance along the apical axis. Most diatoms consequently are considerably wider than they are long.
Three axial planes correspond to the axes. The plane of cell division, the valvar plane, is at right angles to the
pervalvar axis; the apical plane, perpendicular to the transapical axis; and the transapical plane, perpendicular
to the apical axis. These planes can be considered as planes of symmetry in most diatoms, but many forms
have unequal poles due to twisting or bending of the cells and are consequently more or less asymmetrical.
The diatom cell is seen from one of two aspects, the valve view, in which the valve surface is visible (fig. A,
2; fig. B, 2), or the girdle view, in which the girdle is exposed (fig. A, 1; fig. B, 1). Except in circular diatoms,
the girdle view can be further divided into the broad girdle view (fig. B, 1), in which the transapical axis of the
cell is parallel to the axis of the microscope, and the narrow girdle view (fig. B, 3), in which the apical axis is
turned toward the observer.
Diatoms are extremely variable in form. They may be symmetrical or asymmetrical. The various degrees
of symmetry or asymmetry are brought about by unequal growth of either the valves or the girdle. Some
are circular or oval, others linear or club-shaped, or more or less crescentic or arcuate; some are biangular,
triangular, or polygonal, others are wedge-shaped in one or both aspects, or sigmoid, or undulate. The most
common form in the entire group is naviculoid, resembling the horizontal section of a boat or canoe with the
two ends alike; a very large number are circular or elliptical. Many species have spines (fig. C, 8, s; fig. D, 4,
s), horns (fig. D, 4, pr), keels (fig. E, 4, k1, k2), setae (fig. H, 1, 2, 3, s, ts) (the long, delicate, often threadlike
bristles arising from the corners of the valves in the genus Chaetoceros), or other specialized protuberances or
structures. In some species the cells become very long because
7
Fig. C. Types of intercalary bands: (1) Rhizosolenia cylindrus Cl.—numerous ring-shaped bands; (2) R.
arafurensis Castr.—scale-shaped, rhombic to almost square bands with undulating margins; (3) R. clevei
Osten.—numerous scale-shaped bands with smooth margins; (4) R. castracanei H. Pér.—numerous
scalelike, moderately flat rhombic bands with slightly wavy borders; (5) R. styliformis var. longispina
Hust.—scalelike bands; (6) Dactyliosolen mediterraneus H. Pér.—half-collar-shaped bands (the ends are
in a nearly straight line); (7) Lauderia annulata Cl—numerous collar-shaped bands; (8) Chaetoceros
eibenii Grun. —ring-shaped bands (the same type is found in C. costatus Pav., as is shown in fig. 79); (9)
Guinardia flaccida (Castr.) H. Pér.—small, numerous collar-shaped bands (the ends are spirally placed).
All figures are in girdle view. P, pervalvar axis; ap, apical process; vs, valve (calyptra) surface; g, girdle;
ib, intercalary bands; w, winglike expansion; sp, spinule; s, spine on valve surface.
8
Fig. D. Diagrams of special structures: (1 and 2) Thalassiosira aestivalis Gran and Angst—(1) girdle
view and (2) valve view; (3) Coscinodiscus centralis var. pacifica Gran and Angst—valve view;
(4). Biddulphia mobiliensis Bail.—girdle view (recently divided cells). P, pervalvar axis; gt1, heavy
gelatinous thread connecting cells into chains; gt2, delicate gelatinous threads extending from marginal
spinulae (sp); sp, marginal spinulae; ib, intercalary band; g, girdle; vm, valve mantle; vs, valve surface;
cp, central mucilage pore; ap, apiculus; cr, center rosette; s, spine; pr, process or horn.
9
of the large number of intercalary bands that are present. In the genus Rhizosolenia, for example, the great
elongation of many of the species makes it virtually impossible ever to see the entire valve surface (fig. C,
1–5).
Longitudinal septa (fig. E, 1, se), ingrowths from the intercalary bands, are present in some diatoms. These
are always more or less perforated and nearly parallel to the valve face. In Climacosphenia moniligera each
septum has a series of numerous perforations (fig. E, 2, se). The number of septa depends upon the number of
intercalary bands. The septa are usually plane but may be undulate, as in the genus Grammatophora (fig. E, 1,
se).
Small internal thickenings or nodules of a rounded or conical shape and generally containing a cavity are
found in the siliceous walls of the valves of many pennate diatoms, especially in the naviculoid species. They
occur in the center as a central nodule (fig. B, 1 and 2, cn) and at each end of the valve as terminal nodules
(fig. B, 1 and 2, tn). In many of the pennate diatoms the nodules are connected by a line or slit known as a
raphe (fig. B, 2 and 3, r1, r2) through which the protoplasm comes in contact with the water. It is in those
forms which possess a raphe that movement is possible.
Smooth areas frequently occur on valves otherwise striated. If the hyaline area is around the central nodule,
it is known as the central area (fig. B, 2, ca); if along each side of the raphe, as the axial or longitudinal area
(fig. B, 2, aa).
The raphe, although usually median in position, may be at the side or along the margin. It is typically a
straight, undulating, or sigmoid line. In the Naviculoideae the cleft of the raphe is not in a vertical plane but is
always bent, and is often V-shaped in cross section (fig. B, 3, r1, r2). In many species the cleft is closed in the
middle region along the bend or point of the V. Consequently there are two cleftlike fissures, one on the inner
side, the inner fissure (fig. B, 3, if), and one on the outer side, the outer fissure (fig. B, 3, of), of each valve.
The central nodule is perforated by two canals each of which joins together the outer and inner fissures of one
half of the valve. A canal runs along the inner side of the nodule joining both halves of the inner fissure. At
each end of the valve the inner fissure ends in a funnel-shaped structure (fig. B, 2, f) which projects into the
cavity of the terminal nodule. The outer fissure ends in a terminal or polar fissure (fig. B, 2, tf), a curved slit in
the terminal nodule. Usually the terminal fissures of the same valve are curved in the same direction, although
a few species are known in which they are curved in opposite directions. The corresponding fissures of the two
valves of single individuals are always curved in opposite directions.
The raphe of other pennate diatoms differs from that found in the Naviculoideae. In Surirella the lateral
margins of each valve are extended as winglike expansions, four to each cell. Near the free edge of each wing
is a fine raphe-canal, with a longitudinal fissure extending the whole length and placing it in communication
with the exterior. Cross canals connect it with the interior of the cell. In Nitzschia a raphe-canal with a
longitudinal fissure similar to that of Surirella extends along the whole length of the keel (fig. E, 4, k1, k2) of
each valve.
Fig. E. Diagrams of special structures: (1) Thalassiothrix mediterranea var. pacifica Cupp—valve view
(mp, mucilage pore; p, puncta on striae; ps, pseudoraphe); (2–4) Nitzschia pacifica Cupp—(2) valve view
and (3) valve view, with the section more highly magnified (st, striae; kp, keel puncta; p, puncta on striae);
(4) diagrammatic transverse section (P, pervalvar axis; k1, keel of epivalve; k2, keel of hypovalve).
Fig. F. Diagrams showing the structure of septa in Grammatophora and Climacosphenia: (1) Gram-
matophora oceanica (Ehr.) Grun.—diagrammatic section in girdle view (ib, intercalary band; g, girdle;
vm, valve mantle; se, septum; f, foramen); (2) Climacosphenia moniligera Ehr.—se, perforated septum.
11
In some diatoms a narrow, hyaline axial area without a central nodule, a pseudoraphe(fig. E, 1, ps), is
present. This is not a true raphe because there is no cleft in the valve. It may be present on both valves of a cell
or on only one. In Achnanthes one valve has a pseudoraphe, the other a true raphe; in Fragilaria both valves
have a pseudoraphe.
The cell walls of diatoms are variously sculptured, in the great majority of forms more or less symmetrically.
A few diatoms are known in which the valves are apparently smooth. The markings consist of small cavities
within the cell wall, most often arranged in regular rows to give the appearance of
Fig. G. Structure of the cell wall of Coscinodiscus centralis var. pacifica Gran and
Angst:(1)diagrammatic section through the wall; (2) section with the focus on the poroid outer closing
membrance (on the region marked i in diagram 1); (3) section with the focus on the chamber openings
of the areolae (on the region marked ii in diagram 1); (4) section with the focus slightly lower (on the
region marked iii in diagram 1). m, outer closing membrane; pr, poroid; p, pore; cw, chamber wall of
areola; co, chamber opening of areola in inner membrane layer.
striations or areolations. Usually both real pores and poroids are present. The pores (fig. D, 2, cp; fig. E, 1,
mp; fig. G, 2 and 3, p) are actual perforations, from 0.1 to 0.6µ in diameter (1µ or micron = 0.001 millimeter),
and are often found at the corners of the cell, over the whole surface of the valves, or near the margin. A large
number may be grouped near the ends of the valves (the corners of the cell in broad girdle view), forming
“pore plates” through which a gelatinous substance is secreted to form cushions or stalks to hold the cells to
the substrate. The marginal pores often form spinulae (fig. C, 7, sp; fig. D, 1, 2, 3, sp), raised points frequently
produced as small spines and penetrated by a pore channel. They may secrete a gelatinous material in the form
of long, delicate, radiating threads (fig. D, 1, gt2) or as an amorphous mass visible only when stained. Apiculi,
single, large, marginal nodules penetrated by a pore channel, are present in some genera near the margin of the
valve. Often two
12
are placed on the margin of the valve asymmetrically about 120° apart (fig. D, 3, ap; fig. 22, a, d).
The poroids (fig. G, 1 and 2, pr) are thinner areas surrounded by thicker ones. They are larger than 0.6µ in
diameter.
Fig. H. Diagrammatic representation of the genus Chaetoceros: (1) broad girdle view; (2) narrow girdle
view; (3) valve view. Axes: A, apical axis; T, transapical axis; P, pervalvar axis (chain axis). Structure:vs,
valve surface; vm, valve mantle; g, girdle; c, corner of valve; s, seta (setae, plural); ts, terminal seta; bs,
base of seta; a, aperture or foramen.
The striae (Fig. E, 2, st) are prolonged furrows closed on the outside and open on the inside. They vary in
strength from conspicuous ribs or costae (fig. B, 1 and 2, c) to lines so fine as readily to escape detection. Most
striae are actually linear series of small dots, puncta (fig. E, 1, and 3, p), due to
13
cavities situated within more or less pronounced ridges of the walls which project either toward the outside or
the inside. The costae are not always composed of series of puncta.
Areolae are polygonal or rounded areas or cavities closed by a thin siliceous membrane and framed by
partitions (fig. G, 1–4). They are open either toward the exterior or toward the interior. In the great majority of
species the closing membrane (fig. G, 1, m) is at the outside of the areolae, whereas the inside is open or only
partly closed (fig. G, 1, 3, 4, co). In a few genera with very thick walls, the areolae may be open at the outside
(Triceratium). The closing membrane may be traversed by fine pores or minute poroids (fig. G, 1, 2, 3, p, pr).
Gran and Angst (1931) classed both striae and areolae as poroids. Thorough discussions of cell-wall structure
may be found in Hustedt (1930) and in Fritsch (1935).
In the Centricae or centric diatoms, chiefly marine species, the markings on the valve faces are generally
radially arranged (fig. A, 2). In the Pennatae or pennate diatoms the sculpturing is arranged in connection with
a longitudinal line (fig. B, 2).
PROTOPLAST
The inner wall of the diatom cell is lined with a thin layer of colorless cytoplasm which goes into the various
extensions of the cell cavity and into the chambers, pores, and canals in the cell wall. In the majority of diatoms
the principal mass of the cytoplasm lies in the middle of the cell forming a cytoplasmic bridge between the
opposite walls. The nucleus lies embedded in this bridge. Many variations of this arrangement are found,
however, depending upon the symmetry of the cells. The general form and position of the bridge is fairly
constant within a given species. In many species it is displaced to one side determined by the form of the cell;
in others, instead of a cytoplasmic bridge, we find only a cone-shaped projection running from one wall toward
the center. In many centric diatoms a central mass lies in the middle of the cell suspended by cytoplasmic
threads, whereas in others a lens-shaped cytoplasmic mass lies along one valve. The central part of the cell is
occupied by one large vacuole, which may be divided into two approximately similar vacuoles by the central
cytoplasmic bridge or into several smaller vacuoles by more or less numerous cytoplasmic threads or bands if
the central bridge is lacking. Protoplasmic streaming is conspicuous only in the genus Rhizosolenia.
The chromatophores of diatoms vary greatly in shape and position, but are characteristic for each species. In
some species only one is present, in others many. They may be small and discoidal or large and platelike, or
they may be large anastomosing structures occupying a large proportion of the cytoplasm. Many are irregular
in shape, bandlike, or decidedly lobed. In some species they appear to be perforated plates. They usually
extend into the chambers of cells that have incomplete partitions.
The naviculoid diatoms usually have platelike chromatophores. These have a very similar form and
disposition in closely related species. Most of the Centricae have rounded or lobed disklike chromatophores,
usually numerous
14
in each cell. Exceptions occur frequently. Variations often appear within a given genus. For example, in
Chaetoceros some species with one or several plates are known, whereas many have numerous disklike or
granulelike chromatophores. Both types occur in the genus Synedra.
Chromatophores usually lie along the girdle-band side or along the valve and often overlap from one side to
the other, but seldom lie in the center of the cell. In the Centricae that live as single cells, the disks or granules
usually lie along the valve, whereas in the colony-building species of this group the chromatophores usually
lie on the girdle-band side. In a number of species of Chaetoceros the chromatophores are also present in the
setae.
Early systems of classification were based upon the disposition and mode of division of the chromatophores.
Such systems are not practicable because of the difficulty of studying the normal shape and distribution of
chromatophores except in very fresh, living or very carefully handled and prepared material and because of the
necessity of including fossil forms in our classification. Nevertheless, both the form of chromatophores and
their disposition in the cell are of importance in classification. Mereschkowsky (1901) added a great deal to
our knowledge of their structure.
The chromatophores appear to be yellow, golden brown, greenish brown, or in some forms true green.
Some confusion still exists concerning the true nature of the pigments present in diatoms. Early investigators
regarded the color of diatoms as due to a single pigment, which Nägeli (1849) called “diatomin.” Askenasy
(1867) used the name for the brownish-yellow pigment which could be extracted with alcohol. He described it
as having a strong absorption of the blue half of the spectrum and showing a characteristic intense blue-green
color on addition of H2SO4 or HCl to the alcoholic solution. Nebelung (1878) extracted a yellow pigment
from Melosira species with petroleum ether. He called the pigment phycoxanthin, but the principal pigment
extracted may have been carotin.
Tammes (1900), Zopf (1900), Kohl (1902), and Molisch (1905) gave further proof of the carotinoid nature
of diatom pigments. Kohl (1902) concluded that the pigment known as “diatomin” is actually carotin. Molisch
(1905) observed that the species which he studied gave the so-called leucocyan reaction, which is apparently
specific for fucoxanthin. Askenasy (1867) had observed the same reaction for alcoholic extracts of diatoms.
Kohl (1906), studying the pigments spectroscopically, concluded that the following three pigments are
present: (1) chlorophyll, with an absorption spectrum the same as that of chlorophyll from the higher plants;
(2) carotin, the principal carotinoid present in the diatoms; and (3) probably β-xanthophyll. Palmer (1922)
summarized his review of work on diatom pigments by saying that “carotin appears to be the principal
carotinoid present in the diatoms. There is a possibility, also, that xanthophylls and fucoxanthin are present.”
He substantiated Kohl’s observations.
Gillam, El Ridi, and Wimpenny (1939) found, upon examination of a large phytoplankton sample containing
Rhizosolenia styliformis and Biddulphia
15
sinensis only, that carotin and xanthophyll were present in the ratio of 1: 1.82. This is comparable with the
ratio typical of land plants. The total carotinoids equaled 0.1 per cent calculated on dry weight.
In many species of diatoms the chromatophores contain lens-shaped or nearly spherical, bright, glistening
bodies, known as pyrenoids, which are variable in number and disposition. Only one may be present in a
chromatophore, or several. Some lie near the center of the chromatophore, others near the margin. Frequently
they are grouped in clusters. They may even partially or entirely emerge from the chromatophores and appear as
free colorless bodies. Pyrenoids are not commonly found in the Centricae, and are variable in their occurrence,
even among species of the same genus, in the Pennatae. Their exact function is not known, but they seem to
act as special reservefood bodies.
Drops of fatty oil occur in most, or probably in all, diatoms. These vary in size but are usually more
conspicuous than the pyrenoids. This oil is soluble in ether and is blackened by osmic acid. It has been shown
to be a food reserve. Fatty oil is the principal product of assimilation in the diatoms.
Other cytoplasmic inclusions, Butschli’s red corpuscles or granules, often called “oil drops,” are sometimes
present. They are larger than the fatty oil drops, are not soluble in alcohol or ether, and are not blackened
by osmic acid. Stained with Delafield’s hematoxylin, methylene blue, or gentian violet, they become intense
red or red-violet, but even when not stained the granules can be distinguished from the fatty oil drops by their
characteristic dull luster and faintly bluish color. In many diatoms the corpuscles are scattered throughout
the entire cell, in others they seem to have a definite location. Meyer (1904) interpreted them as volutin
granules and concluded that they consist of nucleic acid combined with an organic base. The real function of
the granules is not known, but it is possible that they serve as nitrogenous reserve material. During nuclear
division they gradually disappear, but soon after completion of division appear again in their original place.
They are identical with metachromatic granules.
A number of small, rod-shaped structures disposed in pairs, “double-rods,” are present in the somewhat
denser cytoplasm surrounding the nucleus. They have also been described as plates. It is possible that they
may be reserve-food material, since they disappear during nuclear division; they also may be used in building
the spindle.
The nucleus varies in shape depending somewhat upon the form of the cell. In the Pennatae it is narrowly
ellipsoidal or lens-shaped, nearly reniform (kidney-shaped), or sometimes almost fusiform (spindle-shaped,
tapering at each end), whereas in the Centricae it may be nearly spherical. In the Pennatae it always lies in the
central cytoplasmic bridge; in the Centricae, either in the central plasma mass or embedded in the cytoplasmic
mass lying near the cell wall. Even without staining, the nucleus in most diatoms is distinct. A very weak
solution of methylene blue will make it more prominent in the living diatom, staining it clearly before the rest
of the protoplast is colored.
16
Usually one or more nucleoli are present. When the nucleus is stained and a sufficient magnification is used,
a framework of fine threads of linin can be seen. Chromatin in the form of more or less small granules is
embedded in the nodes of the linin network. A nuclear membrane surrounds the nucleus.
The presence of a centrosome, a small granule in the neighborhood of the nucleus, has been demonstrated
in some of the larger species of Surirella, Navicula, and a few other genera. In Surirella and certain others
the centrosome lies in a slight hollow at one side of the kidney-shaped nucleus. Two centrosomes have been
reported in a few species. Some authors have described the presence of a macronucleus and a micronucleus in
certain diatoms. These are probably equivalent to the nucleus and the centrosome.
BIOLOGY OF DIATOMS
REPRODUCTION
Cell division.—The most common method of reproduction in the diatoms is asexual by cell division, the two
halves of the cell separating. Preliminary to this separation a new valve to each half is formed. Division is
always transverse to the longitudinal axis of the individual, that is, in the valvar plane. A slight increase in the
volume of the cell is the first appreciable change indicating approaching division. Nuclear division, probably
always mitotic, takes place as the first step in the actual division of the cell. There are some differences of
opinion concerning certain details of mitosis (Lauterborn, 1896; Fritsch, 1935). After the nucleus has divided,
two new valves are formed within the old cell wall separating the protoplast into two daughter cells. Each
daughter cell consists of the protoplast and one new valve encased by a valve of the mother cell. At first the
new valves lie free within the mother cell and increase in diameter by growth at the edges. Intercalary bands,
if present, and then girdles are formed. Division is complete when the halves of the mother cell slip out of
each other. Often the girdle of the mother cell projects as a flange for some distance on the side of the new
valve. The diameter of the valve of one daughter cell is necessarily smaller by the double thickness of the cell
wall than that of the mother cell. Some authorities claim that there is a certain degree of compensation for this
diminution after division by growth of the cells. Some regulation of volume occurs by greater elongation of
the girdle zone.
Auxospores.—The formation of auxospores is a process in which the protoplast escapes from its rigid
envelope making possible a return of the cells to maximum size. It is both a striking method of increasing
the cell volume and a type of rejuvenation. In the Pennatae, auxospore formation takes place only when the
individuals have reached a certain reduced size. Below a certain minimum, it likewise fails to occur. Among the
Centricae also, formation of auxospores takes place only in individuals of a certain size range. Gross (1940a)
found auxospore formation in cultures of Ditylum brightwellii taking place only in cells with a diameter of less
than 45µ. Decrease in size is not the
17
only factor influencing auxospore formation, especially among the Pennatae in which a sexual fusion is
involved. The factors are no doubt partly environmental. In the sea the period from one auxospore generation
to another may last for one year or, in some species, even from two to five years (Fritsch, 1935).
So far, no sexual process has been observed in connection with auxospore formation in the Centricae. It
is essentially a relatively simple process for rejuvenation of the protoplast. The two halves of the wall are
forced apart by the protoplast, which becomes surrounded by a thin, slightly silicified pectic membrane, the
perizonium, within which the protoplast rapidly becomes enlarged. Sooner or later valves and connecting bands
are secreted within the perizonium and a new individual, larger than the parent, is produced. The new cell may
have a diameter from two to three times as great as that of the mother cell. The perizonium may be the stretched
pectic layer of the membrane of the parent cell. The pervalvar axis of the rejuvented cell may be a continuation
of that of the mother cell, as in Thalassiosira rotula (fig. 12, e-g) and Rhizosolenia alata (fig. 52-A, h-l), or be
perpendicular to it, as in Rhizosolenia bergonii (fig. 43, e-g) and Chaetoceros compressus (fig. 74, f-h).
In many littoral species auxospore formation is associated with a sexual process. In the Pennatae several
different methods of development of the auxospore have been observed. In some groups two auxospores are
formed in one mother cell in an asexual or imperfectly sexual method. This occurs in many species of Synedra.
In most of the Navicula and Nitzschia species, formation is sexual by the conjugation of two parent cells. Each
mother cell divides into two daughter cells, the four then conjugate in pairs, and two auxospores are formed
from the two zygotes. This is the most common type in the Pennatae. In Surirella and certain other genera
two parent cells blend together to form one auxospore. In Nitzschia paradoxa and N. palea, one auxospore is
formed from a single mother cell. This is also perhaps the only type of auxospore formation in the Centricae,
as described above. Other variations of these methods have been reported. (See Taylor, 1929, Hustedt, 1930,
and Fritsch, 1935, for general discussions; and Gross, 1940a, for recent experimental investigations.)
Microspores.—Investigators have observed the occurrence of more or less numerous, successive, nuclear
divisions without cell division in a number of the centric pelagic marine and fresh-water diatoms. The
resulting products, microspores, have the character of small cells within the mother cell, ordinarily contain
chromatophores, and are usually supplied with two flagella. As a rule the number of microspores within each
cell is a power of two, the final number varying with the size of the cell. In Bacteriastrum delicatulum, Gran and
Angst (1931) recorded the presence of only from four to eight microspores arranged in a single row. Thirty-two
have been reported in Biddulphia mobiliensis.
Microspores have been considered to be gametes which come together to
18
form a zygote. In other words, the formation of microspores has been interpreted as indicating the presence of
a sexual method of reproduction in the Centricae. However, the observations and interpretations presented for
the various species have been many. Fritsch (1935), after a rather long discussion of the numerous observations,
stated: “
The diverse data above taken under review afford little evidence that the microspores are of the nature of
gametes, since fusion has so far only been inferred and not actually established. Moreover, it is probable that
in various cases a confusion with parasitic organisms has occurred. This statement must not, however, be taken
as a denial of the existence of microspores which are clearly established as a method of multiplication in the
Centrales. What remains doubtful is their fate. If the occurrence of reduction during their formation were
clearly substantiated, the sexual nature of the microspores would be rendered very probable, but their exact
role can only be proved by direct observation of living material.
Resting spores.—Resting spores are formed in many neritic species of Centricae after a period of active
vegetative life or during periods when conditions are unfavorable for vegetative growth. They have a
concentrated nutritive content. The spores have very thick walls which are secreted by the protoplast, and
are always made up of two valves, a primary valve and a secondary valve. No girdle is formed. Either or
both valves may be spined. In Chaetoceros the spores do not have the characteristic setae of the vegetative
cells, although they are often provided with elaborate processes. The usual method of formation is within an
ordinary cell, although they are formed in auxospore-like perizonia in only a few species. Only one resting
spore is present in a vegetative cell except in Rhizosolenia setigera, which has two.
The cell may divide just before formation of the resting spore and the new valves may be thickened to form
the primary valves of each resting spore. Two resting spores will then be close to each other, as in the twin
spores of Chaetoceros didymus (fig. 75-A, c-e). In some species, as in Stephanopyxis palmeriana (fig. 4, c,
d), the formation of the secondary valve of the resting spore may result from an unequal cell division. One of
the daughter cells is the resting spore, the other a rudiment of the cell left in the end of the mother cell. This
is a primitive type of resting-spore formation and is considered homologous to the dimorphism found in some
species.
Dimorphism refers to the existence of two forms of the same species, one form of which has much thicker
walls than the other and is less well adapted to a planktonic existence. It is probable that the thick-walled form
represents the means of survival from one period of planktonic activity to another and thus corresponds to the
resting spore. In Rhizosolenia hebetata, a dimorphic species, form hiemalis (fig. 50-A) is the winter (resting
?) or cold-water form with thicker walls; form semispina (fig. 50-B), the more delicate summer or warm-water
form.
Gross recently reported on some interesting experimental work covering the life histories of diatoms (1937)
and the development of isolated resting spores into auxospores in Ditylum brightwellii (1940a, 1940b).
According to his
19
description of the formation of resting spores in cultures of Ditylum (1937), the plasma membrane retracts
from the cell wall and the protoplast gradually shrinks, the protoplasm, nucleus, and chromatophores becoming
concentrated to form a compact spherical body. At first this body is connected with the shell by means of a
number of protoplasmic filaments, which later become resorbed in the course of shrinkage.
Gross concluded from his first experiments (1937) that three factors were responsible for the formation of
resting spores: (1) crowding of the cultures; (2)low light intensity; and (3) low temperatures (below 12° C.).
None of these factors alone could bring about resting-spore formation; only the interaction of all three seemed
to be effective. Later experiments (1940b) showed that the formation and the germination of resting spores
are based upon a very peculiar osmotic behavior. He concluded that Ditylum does not behave as an osmotic
system. Several conditions must be fulfilled to enable Ditylum to maintain the turgor of the vegetative cell. The
absence of any of these conditions causes loss of water and the shrinkage of the cell membrane, or, briefly, the
formation of resting spores. These conditions are: (1) the presence of calcium and sodium; (2) a pH similar to
that of sea water; and (3) a metabolic activity of the cells.
Germination of resting spores is a process almost exactly the opposite of that involved in their formation.
Fine protoplasmic processes are sent out and connect the spore with the old shell. The spore elongates and the
processes or “pseudopodia” become conspicuous. Gradually the expansion of the protoplast is completed and
the cell gains its normal appearance.
Gross (1940a) also observed the germination of resting spores outside the old cell walls. These isolated
spores started germination when they were placed in fresh culture medium. The process is essentially the
same as that taking place inside the shell, but, since the shell is absent, the germinating spore has an unusual
appearance. Fine protoplasmic processes, similar to those described as connecting the spore to the cell wall, are
sent out in all directions. Chromatophores pass along these processes and the protoplasm gradually expands.
In from one to two days the cell body becomes larger and the “pseudopodia” shorter until the cell assumes a
spherical shape again. These spherical bodies resemble auxospores in every respect. An isolated resting spore
regularly passes through this auxospore stage during development. Gross reported that the diameter of the cells
which originated from the isolated resting spore was more than twice that of the parental cell.
It is entirely possible that many resting spores become isolated in the sea while the cell is sinking to greater
depths. Their germination would also result in the formation of broad cells. Since the isolated resting spores
always develop first into auxospores and then into cells of about maximum diameter, it appears that the size of
a centric diatom is imposed upon the cell by the structure of its cell wall and the resulting peculiar mode of cell
division. The observations of Gross showed that the formation of auxospores by the extrusion of the protoplast
from narrow vegetative cells is not necessarily the only method
20
whereby the size of a diatom may be regulated. The appearance of broad cells in plankton samples may also
be due to the germination of isolated resting spores.
COLONY FORMATION AND THE SECRETION OF MUCUS
The attachment of cells to form colonies is accomplished by mucus secreted by the cells themselves. A layer
of mucus or gelatinous strands may be formed between the valve faces resulting in ribbon-shaped or threadlike
colonies. The cells of zigzag colonies are united by small gelatinous cushions at the corners of the valves. In a
few species cells are united by their girdle sides. In certain pelagic species of Nitzschia contact is at the ends
of the cells only.
Some diatoms secrete simple or branched gelatinous stalks by which they are attached to other plants,
animals, or the substrate. Some species secrete a great amount of mucus so that many individuals are embedded
in a common mass. Simple or branched gelatinous tubes may be formed to enclose a large number of cells.
Special pores, situated in definite localized positions in the valves of different genera, often secrete mucus.
They occur near the middle of the valve in some genera, near the ends of the valves in others. This varying
position of the secretory pores is mainly responsible for the many different shapes of colonies. A gelatinous
membrane has been described as stretching between the radiating cells in plankton species of Asterionella.
This would be a special adaptation for flotation.
Secretion of mucus, however, is not the only cause of colony building. Many diatoms are joined into chains
or various-shaped colonies by processes such as spines (fig. D, 4), knobs, or more or less long setae (fig. H).
In Stephanopyxis palmeriana (fig. 4) the cells are bound into chains by spines at right angles to the valve
face. However, a fine canal is present in the spines and through this canal the cementing substance is secreted.
A similar arrangement is present in Skeletonema costatum (fig. 6). In Chaetoceros and Bacteriastrum the
basal parts of the processes or setae, outgrowths on the valves, are joined together and are often more or less
strongly twisted, the free ends then running out into the surrounding water (fig. H). In the genera Lauderia
and Thalassiosira a cytoplasmic thread runs between cells from the center of the valves, and often a row of
spines or cytoplasmic rays projects from the margins of the cells as well (fig. C, 7; fig. D, 1). Cytoplasmic
connections arising from various parts of the cell hold together the chains formed by many truly planktonic
species.
MOVEMENT OF DIATOMS
Although various suggestions have been made in the past hundred years or more concerning the method
or methods by which diatoms move, even today the matter has not been settled to the satisfaction of all
investigators. In some species the movements are relatively slow, in others more rapid. It is an extremely
interesting sight to see the individuals propelling themselves backward and forward, but the method used is
difficult to explain. Frequently the movement is jerky, sometimes creeping and steady. Single cells may
21
move about freely, whole colonies may move together as one cell (Nitzschia pacifica), or the cells in a colony
may move back and forth upon one another (N. paradoxa).
It is generally assumed that only those species having a true raphe are capable of spontaneous movement.
Usually these are not true plankton species. Diatoms with a highly developed raphe show the quickest motion.
Movement may take place when the diatom is in contact with only the surrounding water, contact with a
substratum apparently not being necessary. It is entirely possible that one explanation does not cover all cases
of spontaneous movement. Probably the most generally accepted opinion is that the basis of movement is the
streaming of the cytoplasm through the raphe, which places the cell contents in direct contact with the water
and sets up currents of cytoplasm. The resulting friction is considered to be the cause of the movement.
Various suggestions to account for movement include the protrusion of pseudopodia, differences in surface
tension, the development of osmotic currents, the presence of rows of cilia (actual organs of locomotion),
a lack of synchronism in the chemical action occurring at the two ends of the cell, the presence of fine
gelatinous threads proceeding from the central nodule and running obliquely backward to form an acute angle
with the surface of the frustule, the presence of an outer coating of protoplasm protruded from the raphe and
kept in a state of vibration, or the expulsion of invisible gas molecules (possibly oxygen disengaged by the
chromatophores on exposure to strong light). Mann (1905) wrote that “it is not at all improbable that the
socalled ‘gelatinous sheath’ which overlies uniformly the entire external surface and is connected with the
living cell contents through numerous minute pores, is the seat of this motion, and by undulatory movements
over its surface produces the phenomenon that is so evident and so puzzling. Some explanation based on the
external membrane fits the case better than any other”.
Recently the presence of cilia has again been claimed. The propelling force, at least in some species of
Pleurosigma, has been said to be rapid plasmic vibrations, which is the motive force in other low forms of
motile water organisms— in other words, exceedingly minute ciliary action. One investigator, A. C. Coles
(Taylor, 1929, photographed what he claimed to be cilia. The photographs were of dead specimens, taken after
a drastic process of staining with silver. Many diatomists believe that the phenomenon is due to a disintegration
or alteration of the plasmic covering of the diatom during this treatment. Taylor (1929) concluded his discussion
of this subject as follows: “To sum up the present situation (15.11.28), the cilia have been photographed in dead
motile, and perhaps also immotile diatoms, and clearly exhibited. Also under unusually powerful illumination
they have been seen on living motile diatoms by three of the most expert microscopists. Their mode of action
has not yet been observed.”
Good discussions of movement as observed in diatoms are to be found in West (1916), West and Fritsch
(1927), Taylor (1929), Hustedt (1930), and Fritsch (1935)
22
Diatoms are adapted for flotation in a variety of ways. Gran (1912), following Schütt, who studied the various
types of suspension organs carefully, placed the different cell forms with their many adaptations for floating
under four headings:
1. The bladder type: Here the cell is relatively large, the cell wall and protoplasm merely thin
membranes around a large central cavity. The cavity is filled with fluid of about the same specific
gravity as sea water. Species of the genus Coscinodiscus are examples of this group.
2. The ribbon type: The cell wall is thin and the cell is flattened to give a greater surface. The cells
may be joined into ribbon-shaped colonies. Climacodium and Fragilaria are examples of this type.
3. The hair type: The cells are very long in one direction or united into narrow, elongated colonies.
These long cells may be slightly curved or have sloping terminal faces which help maintain them in
a horizontal position and thus keep them floating. Thalassiothrix and Rhizosolenia are examples.
4. The branching type: The genus Chaetoceros with its four long setae from each cell is a good
example of this group. The cells are usually found in chains. Other outgrowths such as knobs and
spines also help increase the surface.
The secretion of long filaments or masses of mucus from special pores probably aids in flotation. The
extrusion of protoplasmic threads or streams probably serves the same purpose by stream friction against the
surrounding water and by increase of surface. In Planktoniella sol (fig. 27), widely distributed in the oceanic
plankton of warmer seas, the epivalve is provided with a broad, hollow, slightly silicified wing divided by septa
into a series of chambers. Sometimes this wing extends straight out from the cell, at other times it is bent to
resemble an umbrella.
The production of gases and oils by the living diatom cells undoubtedly has a marked effect upon their
ability to float. The specific gravity of diatom cells must be very near that of sea water. Any slight variation
in amount of oil stored, amount of gas produced, length and number of protoplasm threads extruded, or other
factors possibly too unobtrusive to have been considered, may be reflected in the ability of the cells to maintain
themselves at a favorable level in the sea. Conditions external to the individual cells themselves, differences
in density and viscosity of the surrounding water, abundance of other organisms or inorganic material in their
environment, movement of the water, and other factors likewise influence flotation (Gran, 1912; Allen, 1932).
OCCURRENCE AND DISTRIBUTION OF DIATOMS IN THE OCEAN
Diatoms are widespread in their distribution in nature. They live in fresh, brackish, and salt water and in ice,
moist soil, and other damp places. Between 8,000 and 12,000 species have been described from all known
habitats.
Marine species are either pelagic or littoral. Pelagic species are those that live near the surface of the ocean
during all, or at least during the greater
23
part, of their existence. Littoral species live exclusively near shore and are either motile or fixed to a substrate.
Both motile and fixed littoral species occasionally occur in plankton collections. Parts of chains of fixed
bottom-living forms often break away and appear in the plankton. When this occurs, the diatoms are called
tychopelagic forms. They may float about for some time but do not reproduce in the plankton. Before dividing
and starting a new chain, the cell becomes fixed to the substrate. Only a very few species can propagate both
in the neritic (pelagic) zone and in the littoral zone. Biddulphia aurita (fig. 112-A) is an example. Only a
few littoral species that are commonly found in plankton collections will be described here. The present paper
deals for the most part with the pelagic marine species.
The pelagic diatoms are further divided into oceanic and neritic species. Oceanic diatoms are those capable
of living and reproducing entirely in the open ocean. Neritic species are those having their origin near the coast
and reproducing most efficiently under coastal conditions.
Most of the coastal or neritic species have a special adaptation, the resting spores, which serve as protection
against changing conditions. The spores sink into deeper water and may be found there for several months
after the species has disappeared from the surface. The majority remain on the bottom in shallow coastal water
until conditions favor their germination (Gross, 1937, 1940a). Resting spores must be the means by which
many species continue in coastal waters in spite of the fact that conditions are more variable there than in the
open ocean and may be favorable to diatoms for only a limited part of each year. Gran (1912) reported the
formation of resting spores in neritic species even in the open ocean. They apparently sink slowly and remain
in the photosynthetic zone for weeks or even months.
The dividing line between oceanic and neritic species cannot be closely drawn. Oceanic species are
frequently collected near shore, whereas neritic species may be found in the open ocean, far from shore, still
continuing to increase although seldom in any great quantity.
Both oceanic and neritic species may be further divided into three main groups according to the latitude in
which they are most commonly found or have had their origin. Thus we speak of arctic, temperate, and tropical
oceanic species and arctic, temperate, and tropical neritic species. Subdividing these again, we have boreal
(northern but not arctic species), north temperate, south temperate, and subtropical species. This classification
is more or less arbitrary. Some species are ubiquitous, others restricted within rather definite regions. There are
a number of species which it is still impossible to place in any definite group. The boundaries of the regions
are variable and the flora of each locality is continually changing with seasonal changes and movements of the
water.
It has been a generally accepted opinion for years that plankton diatoms are more abundant in coastal waters
than in the open ocean, in temperate or especially northerly temperate waters than in tropical seas, and in
certain seasons of the year than in others. Collections made for the Scripps Institution
24
during the last twenty years off the west coast of North America and as far south as Callao, Peru, confirm some
of these opinions, cast doubt on others (Allen, 1929b, 1936). According to the Scripps Institution observations,
no large catches have yet been obtained as far as one hundred miles from shore. Almost all the very large
collections have been made in enclosed regions or very near shore. In a given locality, seasonal distribution of
diatoms has been found to vary widely from year to year. Maximum abundance has tended to occur in spring
but may occur at another season in certain years. Abundance has usually been very low in May, August, and
December in the localities where regular observations have been made for the Scripps Institution. The largest
catches of diatoms have been obtained from rather high latitudes, yet some almost as large have been found
along the California coast. Very large catches have been reported from the Gulf of Panama and along the
coast of Central America (Cupp, 1934; Allen, 1939). Diatom populations were found to be lower at Scotch
Cap, Alaska, than at either La Jolla or Point Hueneme in southern California waters, or at Friday Harbor,
Washington (Phifer, 1933; Cupp, 1937). No latitude should be rated as the most productive until we have more
evidence collected regularly over a long period of time and treated statistically. As yet we have no series of
collections taken regularly throughout a year for tropical regions.
Vertical distribution of autotrophic diatoms is limited to the photosynthetic zone, the depth of which naturally
varies with latitude, time of year, and quantity of organic or inorganic material in the water. During the summer
off southern California the greatest abundance has been found to occur most frequently at depths of from twenty
to thirty-five meters below the surface (Allen, 1929b). The individual species appear to show differences in
their light requirements. A negative correlation between abundance of diatoms and abundance of sunlight has
been demonstrated to exist under certain conditions.
Reports on distribution and abundance of phytoplankton from Alaska to the Gulf of Panama and in the Gulf
of California may be found in the following papers: Allen, 1922, 1923, 1924, 1927a, 1927b, 1927c, 1928a,
1928b, 1928c, 1929a, 1929b, 1930, 1933, 1934a, 1936, 1937, 1938, 1939; Allen and Lewis, 1927; Bigelow
and Leslie, 1930; Cupp, 1930, 1934, 1937; Cupp and Allen, 1938; Phifer, 1933.
ASSOCIATIONS OF DIATOMS WITH OTHER ORGANISMS
Several different types of associations exist between diatoms and other organisms. True parasites have been
reported in some species. The fungus Olpidium phycophagum, an encysted parasite, has been found in
Eucampia zoodiacus and in many other species of diatoms. Other fungi also have been observed. Both
Chaetoceros and Rhizosolenia have been found containing the alga Richelia intercellularis, one of the
Nostocaceae (fig. 48-A, c). The dinoflagellate Paulseniella chaetocerates has been found on Chaetoceros
borealis and C. decipiens. The cells are fixed by small stalks inside the setae and appear as round prominences
outside.
25
Commensalism between three tube-building species of the genus Cymbella and Nitzschia dissipata, fresh-
water diatoms, was described by Cholnoky (1929). In this association Nitzschia utilizes the metabolic products
of Cymbella. A number of cases of symbiosis have been reported, but the existence of a true symbiotic
condition is difficult to establish in diatoms.
The flagellate Solenicola setigera very frequently attaches itself to Dactyliosolen mediterraneus (fig. 38).
It forms a mass or colony on the outside of the cell wall. The individuals, each with a long fiagellum, are
often difficult to distinguish as such. Gran, in 1905, recorded the existence of colonies, but the true structure
of the cells was made known first in 1916 by Pavillard (1916b). In the same paper Pavillard described Bicoeca
mediterranea, a flagellate with a vaselike case, found on Skeletonema costatum, Nitzschia seriata, Cerataulina
bergonii, Chaetoceros anastomosans, C. lorenzianus, and Thalassiothrix frauenfeldii. His sketch shows a
group of six individuals on Nitzschia seriata. A similar organism is often found on N. pacifica in water off La
Jolla (fig. 157, l). Here the cells do not occur in groups but are distributed over the length of the valve. As
many as twenty-eight individuals have been seen on one cell of N. pacifica. The protozoan Vorticella oceanica
is often abundant on Chaetoceros coarctatus (fig. 62, a). Ostenfeld (1902), in his description of Palmeria
hardmaniana, stated: “Curious is a curved fissure on the valves; in most specimens which I have seen, this
fissure was a place of refuge for a little protist, probably an Amphorella borealis (Hensen) Dad., var. nov.; the
small, more or less numerous, organisms were fixed to the inner side of the fissure.” Fragilaria parasitica has
been found attached to another diatom, Nitzschia sigmoidea. Bacteria are probably among the most important
epiphytic organisms which are associated with marine diatoms.
Diatoms themselves may live on animals. Chaetoceros tetrastichon and C. dadayi (fig. 64, a) both live
attached to Tintinnus inquilinus, a Tintinnid (Protozoa). Hemiaulus hauckii and Chaetoceros peruvianus are
associated with another Tintinnid, Tintinnus lusus-undae. The diatoms are always in definite positions in
relation to their hosts.
Antarctic Fin whales and Blue whales are often covered with a buffish colored film easily seen on the white
parts of the body. A Blue whale in this condition is known to whalers as a “Sulphur Bottom.” Whales with
this film are caught off the Shetlands during February and March. E. W. Nelson (1920) examined the film and
found it consisted of a new species of Cocconeis which he named Cocconeis ceticola. Bands of buffish-colored
film similar to that on whales often occur on icebergs and sea ice in Antarctic waters.
Many species of diatoms live attached to other plants and occasionally become broken off to be collected
with the plankton. Numerous other interesting associations have been recorded.
26
PHYSIOLOGY OF DIATOMS
NUTRITION
Diatoms are predominantly autotrophic or holophytic organisms. They build organic matter from inorganic
materials present in their environment. By means of the pigments present in the chromatophores, the cells
are able in the presence of sunlight to fix the carbon dioxide dissolved in the sea water and use the carbon to
build up complex foods, or, in other words, to carry on photosynthesis. Fatty oil is the principal product of
assimilation in the diatoms. Oil is stored in vacuoles as a reserve-food material. Starch or other carbohydrate
synthesis is at a minimum, whereas the droplets of fat as seen in microscopic examination, although actually
small, are really large in comparison with the total bulk of the minute diatom cell. Oils prepared by extraction
from masses of diatoms have the characteristic odor of fish oil. Fat synthesis in marine plants plays a role in
aquatic life somewhat analogous to that of photosynthesis of carbohydrates by green plants in terrestrial life.
Fat production may be indirectly dependent upon photosynthesis, since all great accumulations of fat in the
plant world are found in green or at least in pigmented plants.
A few species with a complete absence of pigment have been described as saprophytic. Such forms are
found usually where decaying organic matter is abundant in the water. Most of the known saprophytic forms
are extremely motile. Karsten (1901) produced a saprophytic form of Nitzschia palea by growing it in a
favorable nutritive medium of glycerine, dextrose, and tap water. Experimentally it has been found that most
of the species cultured for nutritional studies have been capable of living as heterotrophic individuals.
The nutritional requirements of autotrophic diatoms resemble those of other green plants. Certain differ-
ences, however, have been demonstrated. Calcium is essential to the growth and development of all green
plants. It is not essential for some of the lower algae including at least some of the diatoms. Sodium, not one of
the essential elements for the normal development of seed-bearing plants, is required by diatoms. Silica is of
course necessary for the building of the diatom frustules and may be necessary for normal nutrition. Bachrach
and Lefèvre (1929) reported that in culture experiments certain marine and fresh-water diatoms lived without
a siliceous frustule, and retained their ability to move and divide, although the determination of the species
became impossible because of their loss of normal shape. Harvey (1933) and ZoBell (1935) reported that the
addition of a little silicate to culture media improves the growth of diatoms. Harvey (1939) found that Ditylum
brightwellii required manganese. A concentration of one part per thousand million parts was sufficient for
vigorous growth. Iodine does not appear to be necessary for the growth and development of diatoms. Nitrogen,
phosphorus, potassium, magnesium, oxygen, hydrogen, carbon, sulfur, and iron are as essential to the normal
development of diatoms as to that of higher plants.
27
A number of investigators have demonstrated experimentally that diatoms and certain other algae utilize
ammonium nitrogen as readily as, or even in preference to, nitrate nitrogen (Schreiber, 1927; Cooper, 1933;
ZoBell, 1935; Harvey, 1940). Many data suggest that in the sea much more ammonium than nitrate is used
by diatoms. Harvey (1940) reported that diatoms also use urea, uric acid, and possibly certain amino acids as
sources of nitrogen.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS LIMITING PHYTOPLANKTON PRODUCTION AND POPULATIONS
For many years attention has been attracted to the problem of limiting factors in the production of marine
phytoplankton—factors that account for the variation in abundance of cells at different seasons of the year, in
various localities, and at different depths in the ocean. Many factors are involved and interrelated. Chemical
factors influencing production include the presence of phosphate, nitrate or ammonium, silica, oxygen, carbon
dioxide, numerous other secondary elements such as iron, sulfur, sodium, and manganese, and the salinity and
hydrogen ion concentration. Light, its intensity and duration, temperature, viscosity, and density make up the
physical factors involved. Upwelling and vertical mixing are factors in the circulation of the water that have a
great effect upon the supply of nutritive salts. (Gran, 1930, 1931; Atkins, 1926a; Moberg, 1928.)
Brandt (1902) first advanced the theory that certain indispensable nutritive substances occur in such small
amounts that, according to Liebig’s minimum law, they act as limiting factors. Nathansohn (1906) was the
first to record that vertical currents are intimately bound up with the circulation of these nutritive substances.
The importance of upwelling and vertical mixing has been emphasized by recent investigations. Bigelow and
Leslie (1930) concluded that upwelling is the chief agent in bringing new supplies of nutrients to the surface
in Monterey Bay, as off southern California (Moberg, 1928). Moberg also discussed the effect of the rate of
upwelling and its importance in bringing nutrients to the diatom zone at a favorable time.
Gran (1933) stated that it is now well known that most of the differences in the productivity of the various
areas in the sea can be explained from the distribution of the nitrates and phosphates acting as limiting factors.
(See also Atkins, 1923a, 1926b, 1926c, 1928, 1930; Gran, 1929; Harvey, 1926, 1928, 1933; Harvey, Cooper,
Lebour, and Russell, 1935; Marshall and Orr, 1927; Moberg, 1928; ZoBell, 1935.) There is some indication
that soluble iron may be present in sea water in insufficient quantities to support a rapid growth, particularly
of the neritic diatoms (Harvey, 1937). Silica may possibly be a limiting factor in some localities but definite
proof is not yet available. (See Atkins, 1923b, 1926a, 1928, 1930; Harvey, 1933; Marshall and Orr, 1927;
Moberg, 1928.) In different regions or at different times of the year in the same region, different salts may be
the limiting factors for plant production. For example, Atkins (1928) found the surface water of the English
Channel depleted of phosphates during periods of mass production of diatoms, whereas in
28
southern California coastal waters Moberg (1928) found the upper 25 meters of water entirely denuded of
nitrates but containing measurable amounts of phosphates. Under either condition a large production of diatoms
in the upper layers of water would be prevented. It is possible that some substances that are washed out from
land (humus compounds or other organic matter) alone or in combination with iron or mangenese ions may
increase production (Gran, 1933; Harvey, 1939).
The production and growth of phytoplankton in temperate and higher latitudes is limited by lack of light
during the short winter days with little sunshine. The intensity of light at the surface, together with the
transparency of the water, controls the thickness of the water layer in which photosynthesis takes place. In
Loch Striven, Marshall and Orr (1930) found that the date of the spring increase is apparently determined
chiefly by the total light, which depends on both length of day and brightness.
Oxygen and carbon dioxide are probably never limiting factors in production, at least not under conditions
normally found in the sea.
Diatoms probably greatly influence the pH of sea water in which they are growing. Within the range of
7.8–8.8 the pH does not act as a limiting factor, according to Lucas and Hutchinson (1927). Moberg (1928)
found that off La Jolla, in water from the surface down to 150 meters, the region of greatest variability of pH
was in the photosynthetic zone.
Salinity in itself, within the range occurring normally in the sea, has little direct effect upon production.
Diatoms are tolerant of wide variations in salinity as well as in temperature. However, temperature and salinity
in combination influence the viscosity, the density, and the vertical stability of the water, which in turn tend
to control the activity of its vertical circulation and thus indirectly to favor or hinder the flotation of marine
diatoms and the presence of an adequate food supply for them as the seasons change.
The temperature optimum for diatoms is not known. The various species live over a range of several degrees.
Off the coast of southern California in the summer of 1926 (Moberg, 1928), diatoms occupied a layer of water
in which the temperature varied according to depth from 10° C. or less to 20° C. and were most abundant at
depths where the temperature averaged about 13° C. (7° less than at the surface).
The formation and the germination of resting spores are important factors in the seasonal variation in the
abundance of plankton diatoms in the sea.
Grazing of the herbivorous zoöplankton may be one of the most important factors in limiting diatom
populations (Harvey, 1934a, 1934b; Harvey, Cooper, Lebour, and Russell, 1935). The following quotation
from Harvey 1934b) is of interest:
An intimate relation or balance exists between the ever-varying populations of carnivores, herbivores, and vegetable food, which in
its turn is sometimes controlled and always affected by the available nutrient salts and illumination. If the proportion of carnivorous to
herbivorous animals is displaced for a period by an “abnormally large number of carnivores, then the diatoms are free to flourish and
increase their population. If, on the other hand, the balance is displaced for a period by an “abnormally” small proportion of carnivores,
then
29
the herbivores freed from their enemies can flourish, keep the breeding stock of vegetation closely grazed, and by so doing limit their own
increase. This would automatically delay the utilisation of nutrient salts.
Harvey (1934b) concluded that the sudden decrease in vegetation after the spring maximum of 1933 was due to
increased intensity of grazing by the increased numbers of herbivorous zoöplankton. Harvey, Cooper, Lebour,
and Russell (1935) also found a relation between the number of animals and plants, an increase in animals
being accompanied by a decrease in diatom population. They presented evidence showing that the spring
outburst of diatoms is limited in quantity and time by the grazing of herbivorous plankton animals.
IMPORTANCE OF DIATOMS AS A SOURCE OF FOOD IN THE SEA
Diatoms have for many years been recognized as an extremely important source of food for plankton animals.
Haeckel (1890), Johnstone (1908), Lohmann (1911), Gran (1912, 1930, 1931), Lebour (1921, 1922, 1923),
Herdman (1923), Bigelow (1926), and Allen (1934b) have published valuable discussions of the problems
involved in the abundance of life in the sea.
Johnstone (1908) stated: “The Diatomaceae are above all the most important organisms in the sea regarded
from the point of view of their significance as the producers of organic substance. The diatoms are the ‘pastures
of the sea’ and correspond to the ‘grass of the fields’ of the land.” Gran (1930) wrote: “These enormous
quantities of diatoms, without doubt, are the most important food for the pelagic copepods and indirectly for the
fish larvae which develop after the great spring spawning period.” Phifer (1933) likewise wrote: “Marine plants
are the principal source upon which the fauna of the oceans depends for the energy necessary for existence. . . .
Undoubtedly the shore algae produce organic material forming nutritive substances for bacteria which in turn
are probably consumed by small protozoa. However, the phytoplankton are directly consumed and produce
organic food in much larger quantities since the areal extent of their distribution is many times greater than
that of the shore forms. Of the groups in the phytoplankton, such as diatoms, dinoflagellates, algal spores,
coccolithophores, the first mentioned play the major role in temperate seas.”
COLLECTION AND PREPARATION OF DIATOMS FOR EXAMINATION
Although many species of diatoms can be studied and classified directly by examination in water mounts, many
others can be identified only by a careful study of the very delicate sculpturing on the frustules. These must be
treated by some special method to free the cell of everything except its siliceous skeleton and then examined
in a dry condition or mounted in a medium of high refractive index. If we wish to study the cell contents, still
other methods of fixing and staining the cells must be used, depending upon the structures to
30
be examined. Only the methods of collecting, fixing, staining, cleaning, and mounting diatoms used by the
author in preparing material for this paper will be described.
The majority of the diatoms described were obtained in regular plankton collections made by methods
standard at the Scripps Institution–the pouring of a known quantity of water through a small net of No. 25
silk bolting cloth (mesh openings about 0.040–0.076 mm. on a side) and the gathering of the diatoms in a
small bottle attached to the end of the net (Allen, 1921). Some collections were made by simply towing a small
net through the water, others by allowing a liter or more of water to stand in a graduated cylinder until the
diatoms had settled and then decanting the liquid. Smaller species that might escape through a fine net were
collected by centrifuging samples of water.
Approximately 10–15 ml. of formalin (40 per cent solution of formaldehyde in water) were added to each
100 ml. of plankton sample as a preservative for most of the material. A solution made with 5 ml. of 40 per
cent formaldehyde, 5 ml. glacial acetic acid, 40 ml. sea water, and diluted to 100 ml. by the plankton sample
was used as a preservative for material to be prepared for cytological studies (Gran and Angst, 1931).
PREPARATION FOR EXAMINATION
Cleaning of frustules.–Collections containing principally the delicate plankton species were simply washed
in repeated changes of distilled water to free the sample of salt water. A small amount of the material was
placed in a homeopathic vial of about 30 ml. capacity, distilled water added to fill the vial, and the material
gently distributed by rolling the vial in the hands and allowing the air to pass from end to end. The material
was allowed to settle for from four to twelve hours. The supernatant liquid was very gently drawn off by a
suction pump, the vial refilled with distilled water and treated as before. This process was repeated from five
to ten times, or until all possible preservative and sea water had been removed. The material was then stored
in distilled water with a few drops of formalin if Hyrax was to be used as a mounting medium, or transferred
through 35 and 70–95 per cent alcohol if Pleurax was to be used. This method leaves the cells and chains of
delicate species intact.
Collections containing the larger, more robust species were prepared for mounting by boiling them in acids.
The structure of isolated valves is best studied after this treatment has been used to free the cells of all organic
matter. The supernatant liquid was removed, from the sample, the diatom material transferred to a beaker, and
about ten times its volume of commercial hydrochloric acid was added to bring the organic matter partially
into solution and to remove all calcareous shells that might be present. The material was boiled in the acid for
about twenty minutes. After the contents of the beaker had settled, the acid was poured away, fresh acid added,
and the contents again brought to a boil. Commercial nitric acid was then added to the
31
boiling solution to bring about the rapid oxidation of the organic matter. This must be done slowly, drop
by drop, to prevent the contents from foaming over the edge of the beaker. The addition of nitric acid was
continued until the red fumes of nitrous acid produced by the oxidation were no longer given off. The beaker
was then filled with distilled water and the sediment washed free of acids by repeated addition of water and
decantations after settling. If this double-acid method failed to remove all the organic matter, the material was
placed, after washing, in a porcelain evaporating dish or a small distilling flask with as little water as possible.
Ten times its volume of commercial sulfuric acid was added and the material boiled for one or more hours
over a sand bath under a hood; then, while the acid was still boiling, small particles of sodium nitrate were
added cautiously until the blackened mass became colorless or pale yellow. After the sample had cooled, it was
poured into a large volume of water and the supernatant liquid decanted after precipitation repeatedly until the
diatom material was free of acid.
If there was sand in the residue, it was removed after washing by placing the residue in a deep evaporating
dish, three or four inches in diameter, and then gently rotating until the sand collected at the middle of the dish
and the diatoms were carried toward the outer margin of the whirling water. The water was decanted repeatedly
after this process, the residue being rotated each time. The material was preserved as described above.
If the sample was relatively free of organisms or material other than diatoms, the first step, boiling in
hydrochloric acid, was omitted. The material was boiled at once in concentrated nitric acid. If such a sample
had been preserved in alcohol, it was first washed with water to prevent the formation of an ester of nitric acid
which might cause an explosion resulting in loss of the specimens. After boiling, the acid was diluted with
water and the diatoms collected on a filter paper and washed with distilled water, or water was added to the
beaker and decanted after settling, as described above. For a detailed description of these methods of cleaning
diatoms see Mann (1922) and Conger (1925).
Mounting of frustules.–Strewn mounts (mounts made from a drop of material containing several or many
diatoms) were used exclusively. Single-cell mounts have definite value for many types of work, but require
much more time to make than strewn mounts. (Conger (1925) has given detailed directions for mounting single
chains of plankton diatoms and for general single-cell mounting. Two mounting media were used, Hyrax and
Pleurax, both synthetic resins developed by Dr. G. Dallas Hanna of the California Academy of Sciences.
Hyrax is soluble in benzol, xylol, and toluol, but not in alcohol or water. It has an index of refraction of 1.71
when hardened on the slide. Material to be mounted in Hyrax must be stored in distilled water with a few drops
of formalin as a preservative.
A drop or two of diatom material was placed on a clean cover glass; distilled water was then added to flood
the material so that the diatoms would be evenly distributed. The diatoms were allowed to settle and then as
much water as
32
possible was drawn off with a fine pipette. The remainder of the water was evaporated on a brass plate under
which a very small gas burner was placed to supply gentle heat. A drop or two of Hyrax was then placed on
the cover glass with the diatoms, warmed, and the solvent evaporated. The cover glass was next placed, diatom
side down, in the center of a clean glass microscope slide and the slide warmed gently to melt the resin and
permit it to flow evenly about under the cover glass. This took only a few seconds. The temperature must not
be too high or bubbles will be formed. Hyrax preparations can be kept for years if sealed with gold size or
some other lacquer. Unsealed slides may not last longer than six months.
Pleurax, a synthetic resin developed more recently than Hyrax, was used for most of the slides. It is
particularly well suited for mounting delicate plankton diatoms. The index of refraction is above 1.9–higher
than that of any other known resin. The depth of focus of the objective is increased in direct proportion to the
increase of the index of refraction. Pleurax is soluble in 95 per cent alcohol and diatoms are mounted in it
directly from 95 per cent alcohol. No clearing processes are necessary.
A drop of the preserved diatom material was mixed with a drop of Pleurax on the cover glass. The solvent
was partially evaporated by placing the cover glass on a warm brass plate. The cover glass was then reversed
on a clean glass slide and gently heated to not over 100° C., care being taken that no bubbles were formed.
Higher temperatures must be avoided. Slides mounted for four or five years and not sealed with lacquer have
shown excellent keeping qualities
The use of No. 0 or the thinnest of the No. 1 cover glasses is urged because of the short working distance of
the better oil immersion objectives necessary for study of the very fine structure of diatoms.
Additional information concerning Hyrax and Pleurax may be obtained from Dr. G. Dallas Hanna, California
Academy of Sciences, San Francisco, California.
Cell contents.–The formula recommended by Gran and Angst (1931) as a preservative for material to be
used in cytological studies has been given on page 30.
Acid fuchsin (0.5 gram acid fuchsin in 100 ml. distilled water) was used for staining general cytoplasmic
structures. A drop of safranin solution (in 50 per cent alcohol) was occasionally added to material which was
to be studied in water mounts. Methylene blue in a 0.001 per cent aqueous solution (1:100,000) was used for
staining the contents of living cells. In this dilution, the cells can live for a day. Pfitzer’s solution of nigrosin
and picric acid was used to fix and stain the cell contents at the same time. The nigrosin is dissolved in a
saturated solution of picric acid in water.
Chromatophores were best observed in very fresh, living material since they change position and appearance
rapidly. When it was impossible to study fresh material, Bouin’s solution was used as a fixing agent. After
fixation and thorough washing, the material was stained with Delafield’s hematoxylin or
33
acid fuchsin. The nucleus was usually visible in living cells. The inner nuclear structure can be seen only
after special fixing and staining. Gelatinous material was made distinct by putting the diatoms in an emulsion
of Higgins’ India ink. In many cells the pyrenoids could be seen without staining. Detailed study of other
structures within the frustule was not essential to the preparation of the present paper.
For excellent and detailed discussions of fixing agents and stains for general use and for use on special
structures see Lauterborn (1896) and Hustedt (1930).
METHODS OF ILLUSTRATION
Line drawings are believed to be far superior to photographs for showing detail in the delicate plankton species.
For more robust discoid species a combination of both photographs and drawings probably gives the clearest
picture of the appearance of the entire cell and of detailed sections of the structure. All sketches were made with
a camera lucida. All photographs were made with a Leica camera and Micro Ibso attachment on Panatomic-X
film through a C5 (blue violet) Wratten filter. A ribbon filament lamp was used as the source of illumination.
CLASSIFICATION
The classification followed is based on that of Schütt (1896), with certain modifications introduced by Hustedt
(1930–1937). The chief characteristic of this system is the division of the entire group into two main sections:
(1) the CENTRICAE, or CENTRALES, containing the centric diatoms, those having a concentric or radiating
sculpture around a point or points (no raphe or pseudoraphe is present and spontaneous movement does not
occur); and (2) the PENNATAE, or PENNALES, containing the pennate diatoms, those having their sculpture
arranged with relation to a longitudinal line (these often possess a raphe or pseudoraphe and many species are
capable of spontaneous movement).
The Centricae are by far the more important group in the plankton. We have here figured and described 121
species and 20 forms and varieties in 31 genera belonging to the Centricae, and 39 species and one variety in
20 genera belonging to the Pennatae.
BACILLARIOPHYCEAE
(Diatomales or Bacillariales)
KEY TO CENTRICAE
A. Valves with a concentric or radiating sculpture around a point or points, central or lateral, never arranged in relation to a middle line. Without raphe or pseudoraphe.
Outline circular, oval, or elliptical, sometimes polygonal, rarely crescent-shaped or spindle-shaped.
Processes common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Section CENTRICAE
I. Cells disk-shaped or cylindrical. Valves circular, their surface flat or convex, some-times hemispherical. Valve sculpture arranged in relation to
a central pole. Spines frequent. As a rule without horns or knobs; when present, small.
Subfamily Discoideae
1. Valves circular. Not divided into definite sectors by ribs, rays, or undulating sectors. Sculpturing sometimes arranged in
bundles. Knobs or eyes absent; more or less long spines often present. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tribe Coscinodisceae
a) Cells lens-shaped, round, or cylindrical. Usually united into more or less long typi-
cal chains. Intercalary bands often sculptured. Valve mantle usually strongly devel-
oped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subtribe Melosirinae
Genera: I. Melosira (p. 39)
II. Stephanopyxis (p. 40)
b) Cells short or elongated-cylindrical, bound into close chains by delicate siliceous projections or
gelatinous threads. Cell wall usually weakly siliceous.
Subtribe Skeletoneminae
Genera: III. Skeletonema (p. 43)
IV. Coscinosira (p. 44)
V. Thalassiosira (p. 45)
c) Cells disk- or drum-shaped, usually solitary, very seldom bound into chains. Valve surface slightly
convex, rarely strongly convex, sometimes nearly flat or slightly concave. Intercalary bands hyaline or
rarely very delicately sculptured. Valve mantle not particularly well developed.
Subtribe Coscinodiscinae
Genera: VI. Coscinodiscus (p. 49)
VII. Planktoniella (p. 63)
2. Valves circular. Divided into distinct, complete or incomplete sectors by radial ribs or undulations or by wide hyaline rays
from a characteristically constructed centrum. Without horns or prominent spines. . . . . . Tribe Actinodisceae
a) Valves with radial ribs that begin on the margin but often remain very short. Cells disk-shaped with
almost flat valves. Solitary.
Subtribe Stictodiscinae
Genus: VIII. Arachnoidiscus (p. 65)
b) Valves divided into sharply distinct sectors by radial ridges uniformly running from the margin to the
hyaline central area. Small but distinct spines usually at the marginal ends of these ridges. Alternate
sectors generally depressed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subtribe Actinoptychinae
Genus: IX. Actinoptychus (p.66)
c) Valves sharply divided into sectors by broad hyaline rays running from a hyaline center toward or
to the margin, their outer ends marked with a minute spine; the hyaline center divided into more or
less wedge-shaped divisions confluent with the rays. Spaces between the radiating rays marked with
34
35
3. Valves usually radially waved, eyes or knobs on the elevations, or valves flat and then with singly placed wartlike elevations
or circle of needles.
Tribe Eupodisceae
II. Valves oval or circular in cross section. Cells elongate, cylindrical or subcylindrical, with numerous intercalary bands, without internal septa.
Valve structure arranged in relation to an excentric pole. Cells united into chains by their valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subfamily Solenoideae
a) Valves flat or raised, with or without marginal spines. Excentric process or asymmetrical spine
absent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subtribe Lauderiinae
Genera: XIII. Corethron (p.70)
XIV. Lauderia (p.74)
XV. Schröderella (p.75)
XVI. Dactyliosolen (p.76)
XVII. Leptocylindrus (p.77)
b) Valves with a single often very short spine or process, usually excentrically placed, thus destroying the
symmetry of the cell. Valves flat or convex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Subtribe Rhizosoleniinae
Genera: XVIII. Guinardia (p.78)
XIX. Rhizosolenia (p.79)
III. Cells box-shaped. Pervalvar axis generally shorter, sometimes slightly longer, than the valvar axis. Valves usually oval, sometimes polygonal,
circular or semicircular; unipolar, bipolar, or multipolar, each pole represented by an angle or by a horn or spine, or by both angles and horns. .
Subfamily Biddulphioideae
5. Valves with long setae, longer than the cells. Cells united into chains by basal part of the setae. Seldom living as single
cells. Intercalary bands only seldom present. Valves circular or oval. All species pelagic. . . .Tribe Chaetocereae
Genera: XX. Bacteriastrum (p.95)
XXI. Chaetoceros (p.100)
6. Horns short and thick or, if longer, with claws at the ends. United into chains by the ends of the horns. Valvar plane circular
or elliptical, usually with one to several poles. Valves, therefore, elliptical to circular, two- to many-angled. Intercalary
bands and septa often present. Live partly in plankton, partly littoral. Majority of species marine. Colony building in chains
b) Valves tripolar to multipolar, sometimes with bipolar varieties. Angles not bearing
domelike protrusions or horns. Intercalary bands frequently present. Marine
forms, usually littoral, a few pelagic. . . . . . Subtribe Triceratiinae
Genera: XXV. Ditylum (p.148)
XXVI. Lithodesmium (p.150)
a horn. Usually strongly siliceous. Mostly large robust marine forms that build
chains. Predominantly littoral, but sometimes pelagic. A few species are typically
planktonic and are then more weakly siliceous.
Subtribe Biddulphiinae
Genus: XXVII. Biddulphia (p.151)
36
d) Valves unipolar. Cells in broad girdle view rhombic or trapezoid. Large to very
large, robust marine forms. Littoral. . . .Subtribe Isthmiinae
Genus: XXVIII. Isthmia (p.166)
e) Valves bipolar, tripolar, or quadripolar. Each angle with a long vertical horn
tipped with a claw; or in the bipolar forms either as described or having the
angles of only one valve turned vertically upward into short-pointed ends without
claws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subtribe Hemiaulinae
Genera: XXIX. Cerataulina (p.167)
XXX. Hemiaulus (p.168)
7. Cells without horns. Valves without internal septa. Valves semicircular, broader than long. Intercalary bands very seldom
present. Cells in girdle view cuneate . . . . . . . . . Tribe Euodieae
Genus: XXXI. Hemidiscus (p.170)
KEY TO PENNATAE
B. Valves not centrally constructed, not arranged in relation to a central point but to a median line. Bilaterally symmetrical. Outline generally
boat-shaped or rod-shaped, sometimes oval, cuneate, crescent-shaped, or sigmoid; markings generally pinnate or-transverse. True raphe, or
hyaline median line (pseudoraphe), or raphe obscured by lateral wings or keel (cryptoraphe) always present. Processes such as horns, spines,
etc., uncommon. Cell capable of spontaneous movement if a true raphe is present. Auxospore formation sexual or reduced. Microspores not
certainly found.
Section PENNATAE
IV. Cells in general rod-shaped to tabular-prism-shaped, in valve view usually more or less linear, seldom
club-shaped. In girdle view linear to tabular-rectangular. Intercalary bands and septa frequently
present. Valves with transapical striae or ribs, sometimes areolated-punctated, often with mucilage
pores. Without a true raphe, but usually with a median pseudoraphe. Chromatophores usually more
or less numerous small platelets, seldom a single large plate. Auxospore formation, so far as known,
asexual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subfamily Fragilarioideae
8. Cells in valve view usually linear, more seldom wedge-shaped, frequently with
a) Cells with both poles of apical axis alike, in neither valve nor
9. Cells usually rod-shaped. Usually linear in both valve and girdle view, seldom
wedge-shaped or with tabular girdle view. Intercalary bands sometimes present,
but always without or with only very rudimentary septa.
Tribe Fragilariieae
B-2. One valve of the cell always with Navicula-like raphe, the other without a raphe or with a rudimentary raphe-
knot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subsection Monoraphideae
V. Cells with linear, lanceolate, or elliptical valvar plane, more or less distinctly bent about the apical or
transapical axis. Intercalary bands and septa generally absent, valves, however, sometimes with polar
pseudosepta, individual species also with an intercalary ring with rudimentary chamber-formation on
the valve margin similar to the septa-chambers in the genus Mastogloia. Structure of the membrane:
transapical rows of more or less delicate poroids, often in quincunx. The membrane lying between
the transapical rows stronger, often thickened, riblike. The two valves of a cell usually considerably
differentiated in regard to the structure as well as to the development of the raphe.
Subfamily Achnanthoideae
10. Cells bent about the transapical axis, sometimes also about the apical axis; the
valve with the raphe, concave; the one without a raphe, convex. One valve always
with a developed raphe, the other without, seldom with a very short raphe-knot
VI. Cells of various types as regards structure of membrane, cell contents, and general form. All forms
with a similar characteristic raphe system: an outer and inner fissure and accompanying end and central
knots. Knots often greatly reduced or in many species only slightly developed. Inner and outer fissures
often difficult to distinguish from each other. Raphe usually in the valvar plane, generally distinct,
not developed as a canal raphe; usually without a keel or strongly developed wings, but when present
always without marginal canal and keel puncta. . . . . . . .Subfamily Naviculoideae
11. Cells as a rule of symmetrical construction, transapical axis only seldom with un-
like ends. In girdle view usually rectangular, valves elliptical, linear or lanceolate,
often S-shaped, seldom club-shaped or crescent-shaped. Raphe usually in the val-
var plane. Not perceptibly keeled. Keel if present not punctate. Intercalary bands
and septa sometimes present, usually absent. Cells usually solitary, sometimes in
gelatinous tubes or on a gelatinous stalk, seldom united into bands and then often
12. Raphe on a keel or wing that usually lies in the midline of the valve. Cells usually
twisted about the apical axis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tribe Amphiproreae
Genera: XLVIII. Tropidoneis (p.197)
XLIX. Amphiprora (p.197)
38
VII Keel with canal raphe lying in the valvar plane, often displaced transapically as far as to the valve margin. In this latter case
only one margin of each valve with a keel. Both valves with canal raphe. Keel with puncta . . . Subfamily Nitzschioideae
VIII. Keel with canal raphe lying on the valve margin and running around the entire valve. Raphe system consequently apparently
1783. Müller. Kongl. Vet. Acad. Handl., vol. 4, p. 83, pl. 3, figs. 1–5 (Conferva moniliformis).
1824. Agardh. Syst. alg., p. 8.
Cells short, cylindrical, in long chains. Diameter 23–60µ. Usually in process of division so are united in
twos by girdle bands which have not yet separated. Not keeled. Valves and
Fig. 1. Melosira moniliformis (Müll.) Ag. Part of a chain, girdle view; diameter, 23µ.
Fig. 2. Melosira sulcata (Ehr.) Kütz. a, part of a chain, girdle view; diameter, 40µ. b, section of (a)
showing method of cell connection.
39
40
girdle punctated, 22–24 in 10µ on valve, 15 on girdle. In valve view puncta in partly radiating, mostly
irregular short lines; on valve mantle and girdle in more regular crossrows. Valves circular, very convex,
thick-walled, without local reinforcements on inner side. Chromatophores numerous, edges entire. Nucleus
central. Auxospores frequent.
Very common in littoral zone. Occurs in plankton accidentally (tychopelagic). Cold-water species. Not
reported off southern California.
2. Melosira sulcata (Ehrenberg) Kützing
Figure 2
1857. Greville and Arnott. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinb., vol. 21, pt. 4, p. 64, pl. 6, fig. 109 (Creswellia turris).
In note added to Gregory, 1857.
1861. Ralfs. In Pritchard, Infus., p. 826, pl. 5, fig. 74.
Cells circular, oblong, or ellipsoidal. Spines 12-16 at each end of cell, with distinct line of fusion midway
between neighboring cells. Spines slightly thickened at the tips. Diameter of cells 36-57µ. Areolations coarse,
3½-5 in 10µ, all about the same size, not smaller or only very slightly smaller at the valve margin. Girdle
between two cells leaving a space between the halves of two alternate cells. Resting spores with thick walls
and strong spines at two consecutive ends of adjacent cells.
Neritic. Temperate and subtropical species. Fairly common, but never abundant off southern California and
in Gulf of California.
4. Stephanopyxis palmeriana (Greville) Grunow
Figure 4 (p. 42)
1865. Greville. Trans. Micr. Soc., N.S., vol. 13, p. 2, pl. 1, fig. 9 (Creswellia palmeriana).
1884. Grunow. Denkschr. Kais. Akad. Wissensch. Math.-Naturw. Kl., vol. 48, p. 90.
Cells oblong. In shape much like S.turris, from which it is distinguished by the slight narrowing of the
cylindrical part of the valve against the margin, and by the hexagonal
41
areolations which are slightly smaller near the girdle line than on the rest of the valve. Areolae 1½—2½ in 10µ
at center of valve, 3½-4 on upper part of mantle, and 5–5½ near girdle line. On the newly formed valves 2–2½
areolae in 10µ on mantle (fig. 4, b). Diameter of cells 27–71µ. Cells united in chains by 10–22 hollow spines
arranged in a circle at each
Fig. 3. Stephanopyxis turris (Grev. and Arn.) Ralfs. a, half of a cell, girdle view, showing areolation;
diameter, 36µ. b, vegetative cell showing chromatophores; diameter, 45µ. c, entire cell shown in (a). d,
resting spores; diameter, 48µ.
end of cell. Chromatophores numerous, platelike. Nucleus central. Twin resting spores large, like vegetative
cells but thicker-walled (fig. 4, c, d); primary valve with uniting spines more radiating than in vegetative cells;
secondary valves with acute, diverging spines without connection with another valve.
Neritic. Warmer-water species than S. turris. Reported off southern California but more common in Gulf of
California.
42
Fig. 4. Stephanopyxis palmeriana (Grev.) Grun. a, vegetative cells; diameter, 50µ. b, vegetative cells
just after division; diameter, 45µ. c and d, resting spores; diameter, 27µ. e, valve view; diameter, 71µ.
43
1914. Vidensk. Skrifter. I. Mat.-Naturv. Kl. 1913, no. 8, p. 27, fig. 16.
Cells oblong to spherical. Diameter 24–36µ. Chains short. Spines 6–8, arising at tip of each valve and
reaching valve of adjacent cell, no line of fusion as in preceding species. Valves with hexagonal areolae
becoming slightly larger toward tip of valve. Areolae 5–6 in 10µ on center of valve mantle. No intercalary
bands. Chromatophores numerous, platelike, somewhat elongated. Nucleus central.
Neritic. North temperate to arctic species. Never abundant.
b) SKELETONEMINAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf., p. 62.
Genus III. SKELETONEMA Greville
1865. Trans. Micr. Soc., N.S., vol. 13, p. 43.
Cells circular, lens-shaped, oblong, or cylindrical. Valves circular, somewhat arched, without distinct
structure, with a row of fine spines at the edge of the valve parallel to longitudinal, pervalvar axis. Spines
interlock midway between adjacent cells and unite cells into chains. Cytoplasm of neighboring cells in contact
through hollow spines. Chromatophores one or two in a cell. Nucleus central. Auxospores formed.
Species: 6. S. costatum (fig. 6)
Fig. 5. Stephanopyxis nipponica Gran and Yendo. a, chain of vegetative cells; diameter, 36µ. b, two
cells of a chain more highly magnifled; diameter, 32µ.
1866. Greville. Trans. Micr. Soc., N.S., vol. 14, p. 77, pl. 8, figs. 3–6 (Melosira costata).
1878. Cleve. Bih. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 5, no. 8, p.18
Cells lens-shaped, elliptical, or cylindrical with rounded ends. Chains long, thin, usually straight. Cells
held in chains only by means of spines. Space between cells usually or often longer than cells themselves.
Chromatophores two. Nucleus central. Diameter of cells 3–20µ Auxospores not uncommon (fig. 6, h, i, j). In
chains 6µ in diameter, auxospores are 17–20µ in diameter.
Neritic. Widely distributed in all seas. One of our most abundant species, particularly from February through
April. Recorded up to nearly 2,000,000 cells per liter.
44
Fig. 6. Skeletonema costatum (Grev.) Cl. a–g, vegetative cells; diameters: a, 5µ; b, 10µ; c, 13µ; d, 3µ;
e, 4µ, h–j, parts of chains showing auxospore formation. Diameter of auxospores: h, 17µ; i, 18µ; j, 18µ;
diameter of ordinary cells: h, i, and j, 6µ.
adjacent cell and thus holding cells in chains. Distinct areolae, arranged in rows parallel to the median radius
of the sectors into which the valve sculpture is divided. Cell contents dense and dark.
Neritic. North temperate species. Widely distributed. Not uncommon off southern California, but never in
large numbers.
Fig. 7. Coscinosira polychorda Gran. a, chain of vegetative cells; diameter, 50µ. b, two cells of a chain;
diameter, 61µ.
threads help adapt it for floating. Mainly inhabits cold and temperate seas. Some species not uncommon off
Lower California and in Gulf of California.
Species: 8. T. nordenskiöldii (fig. 8)
9. T. aestivalis (fig. 9)
10. T. decipiens (fig. 10)
11. T. gravida (fig. 11)
12. T. rotula (fig. 12)
13. T. subtilis (fig. 13)
8. Thalassiosira nordenskiöldii Cleve
Figure 8
1873. Bih. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 1, no. 13, p. 6, pl. 1, fig. 1.
Cells in girdle view octangular, in long flexible chains. Valves circular, 14–35µ in diameter, with conical
central depression from which mucilage thread extrudes. Otherwise surface of
Fig. 8. Thalassiosira nordenskiöldii Cl. a, chain with an auxospore; diameter of auxospore, 33µ;
diameter of other cells, 18µ. b, vegetative cells, recently divided; diameter, 20µ. c, vegetative cells;
diameter, 17µ. d, cell showing arrangement of sculpturing on valve mantle; diameter, 15µ. e, cell
containing a resting spore; diameter, 27µ. f, section of valve showing sculpturing.
47
valve flat with beveled outer rim. Small spinulae present at junction of flat area with beveled edge of valve,
directed obliquely outward, usually with long radiating mucilage threads. Chromatophores many, platelike.
Sculpturing on valve very fine, 14-16 puncta in 10µ, irregular in center, in radial rows near margin. Resting
spores, one in a cell, with strongly arched primary and flatter secondary valve.
Neritic. Boreal or arctic species. Reported only occasionally off southern California. Very abundant off
Scotch Cap; Alaska (Cupp, 1937), especially in the last half of April and early May.
9. Thalassiosira aestivalis Gran and Angst
Figure 9
1931. Publ. Puget Sound Biol. Sta., Univ. Wash., vol. 7, p. 436, fig. 10.
Cells quadrangular in girdle view, not octagonal as in T. nordenskiöldii. With beveled corners. Radiating
spinulae at inner margin. Valve flat inside the spinulae, slight conical depression around central mucilage
pore. Cells 20–45µ in diameter. Valve structure very fine, areolae in straight rows parallel to medial line
of a relatively large number of sectors, 20–22 areolae in 10µ at margin; coarser areolae around central pore.
One intercalary band at each valve. Suture between intercalary band and girdle strongly and evenly thickened
around the cell; suture between intercalary band and valve only slightly thickened. Distance between cells
as long as pervalvar axis of cells or longer. Easily confused with T. nordenskiöldii but has smaller spinulae,
narrower marginal zone of valve, and greater distance between cells. (See fig. D, 1 and 2.)
Fig. 9. Thalassiosira aestivalis Gran and Angst. a, vegetative cells showing chromatophores; diameter,
20µ. b, vegetative cells; diameter, 45µ. c, cell showing arrangement of sculpturing; diameter, 24µ. d,
valve view of a cell; diameter, 30µ.
Neritic. Reported off southern California, but distribution in time and abundance not yet known.
48
1878. Grunow. In Schneider, Naturwiss. Beitr. Kenntn. Kaukasusländer, p. 125, pl. 4, fig. 18
(Coscinodiscus excentricus var. decipiens).
1880–85. Grunow. In V. H. Syn., pl. 91, fig. 10 (Coscinodiscus decipiens).
1905. Jrgensen. Hydrogr. biol. invest. Norw. fiords, p. 96, pl. 6, fig. 3.
Cells disk-shaped, united in loose chains with very long spaces between cells. Occasionally in gelatinous
irregular colonies. Valves flat or slightly curved, with rounded margins. Row of strong curved marginal spines,
one apiculus. Diameter of valves 21–54µ. Sculpturing as in Coscinodiscus excentricus with areolae arranged
in curved lines, not radiating from the center, more or less irregular near margin. Areolae 8 in 10µ in center to
13 or 14 in 10µ at margin. One intercalary band per valve. Chromatophores small, numerous.
Fig. 10. Thalassiosira decipiens (Grun.) Jrg. a, chain of vegetative cells; diameter, 21µ c. b, valve of
a cell with arrangement of sculpturing indicated; diameter, 54µ. c, section of same valve as in (b).
Neritic. North temperate species. Reported in Gulf of California. Present but never abundant off southern
California.
11. Thalassiosira gravida Cleve
Figure 11
1896. Bih. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 22, pt. 3, no. 4, p. 12, pl. 2, figs. 14–16.
Cells disk-shaped, 20–50µ in diameter. United in close chains by a thick thread. Girdle view oblong with
rounded edges. Valves flat. Marginal spines very small, arranged in several irregular rows. One larger spine or
apiculus. Valve sculpturing very delicate, not visible in water, areolae in radial rows, about 20 in 10µ, forming
curved, excentric crossing rows.
49
Secondary rows distinct only on margin of valve. Small central area with irregular but distinct punctation.
Resting spores with strongly arched valves, smooth, with coarser areolae. Auxospores not uncommon.
Neritic. Northern species, but not so northern as T. nordenskiöldii. Never common off California. Reported
by Gran (1912) as an arctic species.
12. Thalassiosira rotula Meunier
Figure 12 (p.50)
1910. In Duc d’Orléans, Camp. Arct., p. 264, pl. 29, figs. 67–70.
Cells disk-shaped, united in moderately loose chains by a very thick gelatinous thread. Chains straight
or slightly curved. Space between cells moderately wide. Diameter of cells 30–61µ. Valves flat, only a
little rounded at the extreme margin. Sculpturing delicate and regular. Intercalary bands, one per valve,
characteristically unevenly thickened so that one side of the circle is heavier than the other (Hustedt, 1930,
pp. 327–328, fig. 163). According to the interpretation of Gran and Angst (1931), it is the suture uniting
the intercalary band with the girdle “which is strongly thickened on one side but quite thin on the other.”
Chromatophores small, numerous, around the edge and along the surface of the valve. Auxospores bladderlike,
formed by separation of the valves and formation of large cell between valves.
Neritic. Temperate and south temperate species. Moderately common off southern California. Present in
Gulf of California and north to Scotch Cap, Alaska.
Fig. 11. Thalassiosira gravida Cl. Chain of vegetative cells; diameter, 27µ.
1899. Ostenfeld. Iagttag. Overfl. Temp., Salth. Plankt. i 1898, udgivne af Knudsen og Ostenfeld, p. 55
(Podosira subtilis).
1900. Gran. Nyt Mag. Naturvid., vol. 38, pt. 2, p. 117.
Cells drum-shaped or boxlike, 18–27µ in diameter, embedded in irregular gelatinous masses. Valves
rounded, with a row of very small marginal spines, not visible in water, and one larger spine or apiculus.
Sculpturing very delicate, even in mounted specimens difficult to see, only in the center some distinct scattered
puncta.
Oceanic. Temperate species. Not uncommon off southern California.
c) COSCINODISCINAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf., p. 64.
Genus VI. COSCINODISCUS Ehrenberg
1840. Phys. Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berl. 1838, p. 128.
Cells disk- or box-shaped, single or in twos immediately after cell division. (See fig. A; fig. D, 3; fig. G.)
Valves circular, without large knobs or processes, with hexagonal areolae
Fig. 12. Thalassiosira rotula Meun. a, chain of vegetative cells; diameter, 50µ. b, part of a chain with
sculpturing on valve mantles indicated; diameter, 47µ. c, section of a cell from (b). d, section from center
of valve showing connecting gelatinous thread and sculpturing. e, f, and g, chains showing auxospore
formation. e, long chain formed by division of auxospores; diameter of large cells, 61µ; diameter of
small cells, 37µ. f, two end cells and one from near center of chain shown in (e). g, auxospores; diameter
of auxospore, 60µ; diameter of small cell, 30µ.
51
Fig. 13. Thalassiosira subtilis (Osten.) Gran. a, cells embedded in gelatinous mass: (1) valve view of a
cell; (2) girdle view of recently divided cells; (3) girdle view of a cell (mass also contains dinoflagellates
and another diatom). b, valve view of a cell with sculpturing indicated; diameter, 27µ.
(fig. G, 2 and 3) arranged in various ways or fine round puncta. In the coarser areolated forms two membrane
layers are usually clearly distinguishable. These are bound together by pervalvar-directed areolae walls (fig.
G, 1, cw). The outer layer is either smooth, at least apparently so, or more or less poroid (fig. G, 1, m, pr;
fig. G, 2, pr). In this case the areolae, especially their partitions, appear to be punctated (fig. G, 2, pr). The
inner layer has usually under each areola a larger or smaller opening toward the cell center (inside) (fig. G, 1,
3, 4, co). Upon examination of the valve from the outside, these openings appear to be round “central spots”
in the areolae. The areolae are usually in a closed mesh system but in a number of species they are more or
less rounded and do not touch one another. The center of the disk is either smooth or sculptured, often with
larger areolae forming a rosette (fig. D, 3, cr). In some species the rosette may be present or the central area
may be clear. In many species distinct but small meshes, interstitial meshes, are present at the beginning of
short radial rows of areolae. These may be of systematic importance. Marginal spinulae (fig. D, 3, sp) present
or absent, usually small and difficult to see. Apiculi, one (apiculus) or two, present or absent. If two present,
apiculi are located asymmetrically at an angle of more than 90° and less than 180° on the margin (fig. D, 3,
ap). Intercalary bands often present. Girdle zone formed of a single girdle band to each valve or of one or
more collar-like intercalary bands. Chromatophores numerous small plates. Nucleus usually at center of one
valve, or suspended in center of cell by protoplasmic strands. Auxospores formed by separation of the valves.
A large bladderlike mass of protoplasm comes from one end. The valves may be perfectly flat, slightly or
much rounded, flat or depressed in the center with rounded edges. The cell may be low (almost coin-shaped)
to nearly as high as broad, or may be higher on one side than on the other. Positive identification of species in
water mounts is frequently difficult because of the inability to see fine details, spinulae, and apiculi without
52
special preparation. A knowledge of the general contour of the valves and cell as a whole is consequently of
great help in deciding upon at least a preliminary identification.
Many species are marine pelagic and form an important part of the plankton. Many are bottom forms only
occasionally found in the plankton, and many are heavy, true bottom forms.
The genus Coscinodiscus has been divided in various ways to bring about a more logical and useful
classification. Three main groups are represented in our material.
Group I. Lineati. Valves flat, usually with marginal spinulae. Areolae regular, hexagonal, in straight or
curved rows running across the valve, not radiating from the center.
Species: 14. C. excentricus (fig. 14; pl. 1, fig. 1)
15. C. lineatus (fig. 15)
Group II. Fasciculati. Valves usually more or less flat. (C. stellaris, convex; others flat or nearly flat.)
Spinulae and one or two apiculi present or absent. Areolae of the valve in more or less distinct radial sectors,
with more or less independent system of parallel rows, curved or straight.
Species: 16. C. stellaris (fig. 16)
17. C. curvatulus (fig. 17; pl. 1, fig. 2)
18. C. nitidus (fig. 18)
Group III. Radiati. Valves almost flat, convex or concave; often concave in center. Areolae of the valve
radiating from the center, not distinctly divided into sectors. Rows of areolae with a tendency to dichotomous
branching. Central rosette present or absent. Spinulae and apiculi present or absent.
Species: 19. C. marginatus (fig. 19; pl. 1, fig. 3)
20. C. radiatus (fig. 20; pl. 1, fig. 4)
21. C. granii (fig. 21)
22. C. concinnus (fig. 22)
23. C. wailesii (fig. 23)
24. C. centralis var. pacifica (fig. 24; pl. 2)
25. C. perforatus var. cellulosa (fig. 25-A; pl. 3, fig. 1)
C. perforatus var. pavillardi (fig. 25-B)
26. C. oculus iridis (fig. 26; pl. 3, fig. 2)
GROUP I. LINEATI
Fig. 14. Coscinodiscus excentricus Ehr. a, valve view of cell with arrangement of sculpturing indicated;
diameter, 67µ. b, section of cell illustrated in (a) showing areolation.
Fig. 15. Coscinodiscus lineatus Ehr. a, valve view of a cell showing areolation; diameter, 40µ (chamber
openings indicated on six areolae). b. and c, sketches of areolae at two different focuses.
Fig. 16. Coscinodiscus stellaris Rop. a, section of valve of a cell (note four irregular dark thickenings in
center of valve); diameter, 105µ. b, areolae from near center of valve at slightly different focus from (a).
Fig. 17. Coscinodiscus curvatulus Grun. a, valve view of a cell with arrangement of sculpturing
indicated; diameter, 53µ. b, section of valve illustrated in (a) showing areolae and chamber openings. c,
areolae from near center of valve, focus slightly higher than in (b). d, detail of margin.
55
Oceanic. Temperate species. Rare off California. Recorded from Davis Strait, North Sea, Skaggerak, Irish
Sea, Mediterranean Sea, Antarctic, and in the warm currents of the Atlantic.
17. Coscinodiscus curvatulus Grunow
Figure 17; plate 1, figure 2
1857. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinb., vol. 21, pt. 4, p. 27, pl. 2, fig. 45.
Valves flat, 16–40µ in diameter. Areolae free, not in closed meshwork, circular, occasionally roundish-
rectangular, smaller near the margin. In some specimens a radial distribution of the areolae is apparent.
Fig. 18. Coscinodiscus nitidus Greg. Valve view of a cell; diameter, 16µ.
Fig. 19. Coscinodiscus marginatus Ehr. a, valve view of a cell showing arrangement of areolae; diameter,
45µ. b, part of valve, focus on outer closing membrane. c, part of valve near center, focus slightly lower
than in (b).
56
2½–3 in 10µ in the center, 3–4 at the margin. Chamber openings distinct. Outer closing membrane of the
areolae with a ring of delicate poroids, otherwise apparently homogeneous. The areolae form irregular radial
rows; secondary oblique rows indistinct. In general the structure of the species is inclined toward an irregular
arrangement. The margin of the valve is wide and sharply set off, with very coarse radial striae, 4–6 in 10µ.
Of wide distribution. Found in all oceans sporadically. Not common off California. Fairly numerous in
some collections taken at 46°510 north latitude, 122°060 west longitude.
20. Coscinodiscus radiatus Ehrenberg
Figure 20; plate 1, figure 4
1841. Phys. Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berl. 1839, p. 148, pl. 3, fig. 1, a–c.
Cells flat, coin-shaped disks. Valves flat or very slightly arched. Diameter 35–60µ. Valve surface with
coarse areolae, without rosette or central area. Areolae nearly same size on whole valve, 3–4 in 10µ, except at
margin where they are smaller, 6–7 in 10µ. Inner chamber openings rather indistinct, outer membrane of the
areolae apparently homogeneous. Radial rows usually distinct, secondary rows in spirals, not always apparent.
The structure in this species tends to be irregular. Valve margin small, radially striated, 9–11 striae in 10µ. No
spinulae or apiculi. Girdle zone low. No intercalary bands.
Fig. 20. Coscinodiscus radiatus Ehr. a, valve view; diameter, 47µ. b, part of valve margin. c, areolae
near center showing inner chamber openings. d, areolae near margin.
Oceanic and neritic. Ubiquitous. Never in large numbers off California but not uncommon. Recorded by
Gran (1912) as an oceanic, temperate species.
21. Coscinodiscus granii Gough
Figure 21
1905. North Sea Fish. Invest. Comm. Rep. No. 2, South. Area, on Fish. and Hydrog.
Invest. in the North Sea and Adjacent Waters, 1902–03, p. 338, fig. 313.
Cells with excentric arched valves, one side of cell almost twice as high as the other. Diameter 95–190µ.
Central areolae in a definite rosette. About 8 areolae in 10µ near center, 10 midway to margin, and 11 near
margin; on edge of valve mantle 13 in 10µ. Chamber openings small, dotlike. Outer closing membrane of
areolae very delicately poroid. Radial rows and secondary spiral rows distinct. Marginal spinulae and the
57
hyaline lines radiating from the spinulae toward the center distinct, 5–7µ apart. Two small processes or apiculi
on margin at distance of about 120° from each other. Girdle formed from the two similar girdle bands. No
intercalary bands.
Neritic. Widely distributed. Not uncommon off California. Greatest abundance in Mission Bay near San
Diego. North temperate or boreal species.
Fig. 21. Coscinodiscus granii Gough. a, valve view with arrangement of sculpturing indicated; diameter,
120µ. b and c, girdle views of same cell, recently divided; diameter, 150µ. d, girdle view of another
cell with chromatophores showing typical shape of cell; diameter, 108µ. e, center rosette. f, areolae
midway between center and margin. g and h, two views of marginal region showing small processes p
and marginal spinulae s. i, section of valve mantle A and girdle B.
58
Fig. 22. Coscinodiscus concinnus W. Sm. a, valve with two asymmetrical processes, marginal spinulae,
and radiating lines; diameter, 180µ. b, center of valve. c, sculpturing midway between center and margin.
d, margin of valve with process (apiculus). e, section near margin showing arrangement of sculpturing.
1931. Publ. Puget Sound Biol. Sta., Univ. Wash., vol. 7, p. 448, fig. 26.
Cells cylindrical with concave ends, large, 230-350µ in diameter. Mantle cylindrical,
59
44–70µ high. Center of valve hyaline with irregular outline and free areolae. Areolae about 6 in 10µ. slightly
increasing in size from central area outward, farther out decreasing. Outer membrane delicately poroid.
Marginal spines not visible in valve view,
Fig. 23. Coscinodiscus wailesii Gran and Angst. a, girdle view of a cell; diameter, 350µ. b, center of
valve. c, section of center showing areolae and outer delicately poroid membrane. d, section of valve
mantle A and girdle B, showing spinulae s and hyaline lines radiating from them.
3–5µ from edge of mantle, 10–12µ apart. Distinct hyaline lines radiate inward. Areolae of same size at both
sides of spinulae, 6 in 10µ. Intercalary bands two at each valve, first one broader than the second.
Described from Puget Sound, Washington. Not uncommon off southern California.
60
1931. Publ. Puget Sound Biol. Sta., Univ. Wash., vol. 7, p. 446, fig. 23.
Valves with arched sides and nearly flat or slightly concave center. Diameter 145–260µ. Areolae coarse,
visible in water. Rosette in center of valve distinct. Areolae 3½–4
Fig. 24. Coscinodiscus centralis var. pacifica Gran and Angst. a–d, center rosettes of different
specimens. a and b, focus on areolae and chamber openings. c and d, focus on outer poroid membrane.
e–h, margins of several individuals. e, margin showing process (apiculus). f and g, margin with process
(apiculus) p, and spinulae s. h, section near margin, focus on outer membrane. i, j, k, areolae midway
between center and margin. l, m, n, areolae of another cell midway between center and margin. i and
l, focus on outer membrane; j and m, focus lower, on chamber openings; k and n, focus to give starlike
appearance around chamber openings.
in 10µ near center, 4–5 midway to margin, and 5–6 near margin. Spinulae along margin 5–7µ apart, placed
a short distance in from margin. Three to four rows of areolae between spinulae. Spinulae often difficult to
see in valve view. Radial lines from spinulae toward center indistinct. Two asymmetrical apiculi, sometimes
difficult to see; in some specimens distinct. Two collarlike intercalary bands on each valve, the one nearer the
valve broader than the other. Inner chamber openings distinct, outer membrane more or less strongly poroid.
Radial rows and secondary curved rows marked. Valve margin radially striated, 6–8 striae in 10µ. (See fig. D,
3; fig. G.)
61
The variety is distinguished from the type, according to Gran and Angst (1931), by the flattened center of
the valve, the indistinct radiating lines from the spinulae, and the broader marginal zone outside the spinulae.
Probably oceanic. Temperate or north temperate species. Abundance not known in this region, but not
uncommon north to Alaska.
25. Coscinodiscus perforatus Ehrenberg
1845. Ber. Akad. Wiss. Berl. 1844, p. 78.
Variety cellulosa Grunow
Figure 25-A; plate 3, figure 1
1884. Denkschr. Kais. Akad. Wissensch. Math.-Naturw. KI., vol. 48, p. 75.
Valves flat or slightly convex in the center or sometimes slightly concave. Diameter 90–110µ. Valves with
large areolae forming a closed network unlike the type in which the areolae are free. Rosette present in center
of valve in all individuals observed in our material. Areolae become larger from center toward middle of
radius, then smaller again; 4½ in 10µ in center, 4 midway, and 4½–5 near margin. Inner chamber openings
distinct, outer closing membrane poroid especially on the margins of the areolae. Radial rows of areolae
somewhat more marked than secondary spiral rows. Regular and distinct interstitial mesh placed before the
inserted radial rows. Valve margin small, radially striated, striae 8 in 10µ. Marginal spinulae indistinct, the
two asymmetrical processes or apiculi small.
Fig. 25-A. Coscinodiscus perforatus var. cellulosa Grun. a, section of valve showing areolae and
chamber openings; diameter, 95µ. b, section of same valve, focus higher (note interstitial mesh i). c,
margin with small process or apiculus. d, margin, focus on poroid outer membrane. e, areolae at center
of valve, focus on poroid outer membrane. f, areolae midway between center and margin, focus as in (d)
and (e).
Reported only rarely and so far only in Alaskan waters. Found sporadically in all European seas.
62
1922. Forti. R. Comit. talass. Ital., Mem. 97, p. 124, pl. 8, fig. 143 (Coscinodiscus pavillardi).
1930. Hustedt. Kieselalgen, pt. 1, p. 447, fig. 247.
Similar to preceding variety except in the less regular distribution of the interstitial meshes which are not
found before all the inserted radial rows of areolae. Central region varies in same material. A rosette formation
was found in all specimens examined. Chamber openings distinct. Areolae 4½ in 10µ in center, 3–3½ midway,
and 4–5 at margin. Diameter of valves 143–270µ. The two asymmetrical apiculi small.
Fig. 25-B. Coscinodiscus perforatus var. pavillardi (Forti) Hust. a, section of valve showing areolae and
interstitial mesh i; diameter, 143µ. b, center of another valve; diameter, 190µ. c, areolae near margin of
valve shown in (b). d, same as (c), but focus higher. e, marginal process.
Abundance and distribution in this region unknown. According to Hustedt (1930), reported so far only in
the Mediterranean and in the Gulf of Lion.
26. Coscinodiscus oculus iridis Ehrenberg
Figure 26; plate 3, figure 2
in 10µ near center, near marginal region 2½–3½ in 10µ. Margin small, with radial striae corresponding to the
outer areolae, about 7 in 10µ. Chamber openings distinct. Outer closing membrane with delicate and scarcely
visible poroids. Radial and secondary spiral rows well marked. Marginal spinulae not visible in valve view,
the two asymmetrical processes small but usually distinct.
A widely distributed species. Not common off California but reported occasionally. Oceanic.
Fig. 26. Coscinodiscus oculus iridis Ehr. a, section of a valve showing arrangement of sculpturing;
diameter, 138µ. b, center of valve. c, margin with marginal process as seen from inside of valve. d,
marginal areolae with chamber openings.
1860. Wallich. Trans. Micr. Soc., N.S., vol. 8, p. 38, figs. 1, 2 (Coscinodiscus sol).
1893. Schütt. Pflanzenleb. Hochsee, p. 20, fig. 8.
Valves nearly flat with a structure like that in Coscinodiscus excentricus. Cells disk-shaped. Areolae 5–7 in
10µ in center of valve, 7–8 midway to margin, and 8–9 near margin. Central disk varies in diameter from 21
to 81µ, entire cell from 50 to 165µ. According to Karsten (1907, p. 514, pl. 39, figs. 1–11), only one valve of
the cell is provided with the wings, so upon division one daughter cell has none. Few wingless cells have been
observed, however,
64
Fig. 27. Planktoniella sol (Wall.) Schütt. a–h, valve views of various cells. a, diameter of entire
cell, 113µ; of center, 61µ. b, diameter, 158µ; of center, 40µ. c, diameter, 110µ; of center, 34µ (note
chromatophores). d, diameter, 123µ; of center, 81µ. e–i, cells in process of throwing off old wing-
expansion. e, diameter, 85µ; of center, 22µ. f, diameter, 85µ; of center, 24µ. g, diameter, 95µ; of center,
28µ. h, diameter, 85µ; of center, 21µ. i, semiside or girdle view. j, section of valve showing areolae.
perhaps because they sink rapidly, because they are not distinguishable from Coscinodiscus excentricus, or
because new wings are produced rapidly. Figure 27, e–i shows cells in the process of throwing off the old
wing-expansion.
Oceanic. Probably living near the bottom. Widely distributed but most common in subtropical or tropical
seas. Not uncommon off southern California and in Gulf of California.
65
2. ACTINODISCEAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf., p. 68.
a) STICTODISCINAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf., p. 68.
Genus VIII. ARACHNOIDISCUS Ehrenberg
1849. Hemiptychus Ehrenberg, Ber. Akad. Wiss. Berl. 1848, p. 7.
1850. Ber. Akad. Wiss. Berl. 1849, p. 64.
Cells disk-shaped with circular outline and almost flat valves, slightly concave in the center. Valves with a
circular central area and with a strong framework of spokelike ribs or rays on the inside. The ribs run from
the margin toward the center, ending a short distance from the center and are there joined together by a fine
membrane. Between
Fig. 28. Arachnoidiscus ehrenbergii Bail. a, section of a valve; diameter, 310µ. b, section of center of
valve showing elongated areolae and round ones just outside center as seen from the inner side of the
valve. c, chambers of the valve from the inner side, same individual as shown in (b); diameter, 390µ.
66
these main rays are more or less short marginal ribs, the shortest forming a chambered ring along the valve
margin. In addition to the stronger ribs on the inner side of the outer membrane layer there is a delicate network
of tangential and radial thickenings or ribs that in connection with the larger ribs give the valve the appearance
of a spider web. The unthickened parts of the membrane, areolae, appear to be more or less poroid. The valve
center is distinguished by a special structure.
Species: 28. A. ehrenbergii (fig. 28; pl. 4, fig. 1)
28. Arachnoidiscus ehrenbergii Bailey
Figure 28; plate 4, figure 1
Fig. 29. Actinoptychus undulatus (Bail.) Ralfs. Section of valve showing sculpturing on two of the six
sectors; diameter, 58µ.
b) ACTINOPTYCHINAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf., p. 72.
Genus IX. ACTINOPTYCHUS Ehrenberg
1843. Phys. Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berl. 1841, pp. 400, 409, pl. 1, I, fig. 27; III, fig. 22.
Cells disk-shaped, single. Valves divided into sectors which are alternately raised and depressed. Smooth
central area. No intercalary bands. Cell wall usually of several layers, the individual membranes punctated
–the puncta in crossing lines–and more or less strongly areolated. The areolation is strongest on the outer
layer, on the inner membrane often entirely lacking. On outer margin of the sectors, often only on the raised
ones, seldom displaced toward the cell center, one or more clawlike processes that
67
communicate with the inner cell by a pore canal. Valve margin more or less wide and often with numerous
marginal spinulae.
All species are marine, preferably living on the coast, often found in the plankton.
Species: 29. A. undulatus (fig. 29; pl. 5, fig. 1)
30. A. splendens (fig. 30; pl. 5, fig. 2)
29. Actinoptychus undulatus (Bailey) Ralfs
Figure 29; plate 5, figure 1
1842. Bailey. Amer. Jour. Sci., vol. 42, pl. 2, fig. 11 (Actinocyclus undulatus).
1861. Ralfs. In Pritchard, Infus., p. 839, pl. 5, fig. 88.
Cells disk-shaped with six radial sectors, alternate sectors not in same plane as others. Diameter 40–85µ.
Central smooth field, hexagonal. The raised sectors (seldom all sectors) with a short, blunt process in the
middle of the inner edge of the margin, strongly areolated and punctated. Areolae about 7 in 10µ, toward
the outside of the cell in fairly regular parallel radial rows, toward the center irregular. Puncta in more or
less regular, crossing oblique lines, 16-18 in 10µ. The sunken or depressed sectors usually without a process,
usually in place of areolae only weakly marked dots that are bound together by a network of delicate lines.
Punctation coarser, radial striation less striking, oblique rows stronger, 13–14 in 10µ. Valve margin narrow,
faintly striated. Numerous small spines on outer part of valve and valve margin. Chromatophores numerous.
Neritic. Bottom form. Frequently found in the plankton. Of very wide distribution.
30. Actinoptychus splendens (Shadbolt) Ralfs
Figure 30; plate 5, figure 2
Fig. 30. Actinoptychus splendens (Shad.) Ralfs. a, section of valve near margin; diameter of entire valve,
85µ. b, section of margin. Both (a) and (b) show spatulate process.
Neritic, littoral. Found occasionally in the plankton. Not common off southern California. North or south
temperate species.
68
c) ASTEROLAMPRINAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf., p. 74.
Genus X. ASTEROLAMPRA Ehrenberg
1845. Ber. Akad. Wiss. Berl. 1844, pp. 73, 76.
Cells disk-shaped sharply divided into sectors by broad hyaline rays running from the hyaline center toward
the margin. Rays all of same width and generally tapering to the margin, outer ends with a minute spine.
Hyaline center divided into more or less wedge-shaped divisions. Fine areolation between rays. Central area
either reticulated or divided by straight lines into the same number of parts as the rays.
Species: 31. A. marylandica (fig. 31)
31. Asterolampra marylandica Ehrenberg
Figure 31
Fig. 31. Asterolampra marylandica Ehr. a, valve view of individual with six sectors showing areolae;
diameter, 31µ. b, valve view of cell with seven sectors; diameter, 122µ.
Oceanic. Tropical species. Very rare in plankton collections off southern California.
Genus XI. ASTEROMPHALUS Ehrenberg
1845. Ber. Akad. Wiss. Berl. 1844, pp. 198, 200.
Cells single, disk-shaped, with circular or slightly ovoid outline. Valves flat, with radial undulations.
Areolated with a central smooth region and smooth radial rays running from the central smooth area to the
margin. Rays raised above plane of the valve more as they progress outward. One ray narrower than others.
Girdle zone undulating, following the rays and depressions between them. Chromatophores numerous, often
arranged in rays.
Species: 32. A. heptactis (fig. 32)
69
1857. Brébisson. Bull. Soc. Linn. Normandie, vol. 2, p. 296, pl. 3, fig. 2 (Spantangidium heptactis).
1861. Ralfs. In Pritchard, Infus., p. 838, pl. 8, fig. 21.
Usually seven rays of unequal length, the narrow ray somewhat longer than the others. Central field slightly
excentric, one-fourth to one-third the diameter of cell. Diameter of cells 38–100µ. Areolae rather large, 6 or
6½ in 10µ.
Fig. 32. Asteromphalus heptactis (Bréb.) Ralfs. a, valve view; diameter, 58µ. b, girdle view; diameter,
48µ.
Oceanic. Temperate species. Occasionally found in large numbers off California but usually not numerous.
Reported from Scotch Cap, Alaska (Cupp, 1937), and from Gulf of California (Cupp and Allen, 1938).
3. EUPODISCEAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf., p. 76.
a) AULACODISCINAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf., p. 76.
Genus XII. AULACODISCUS Ehrenberg
1845. Ber. Akad. Wiss. Berl. 1844, p. 73.
Cells discoid or box-shaped. Valves with a circular outline, flat or slightly lower in the middle or convex,
with four or more conical processes symmetrically arranged near the margin. Areolated. Intercalary bands
present. Chromatophores small, numerous.
Species: 33. A. kittoni (fig. 33; pl, fig. 2)
70
Fig. 33. Aulacodiscus kittoni Arn. a, section of valve showing center rosette and marginal process;
diameter, 70µ. b, margin. c, three areolae from midway between center and margin.
1887. Ber. Komm. wissensch. Untersuch. deutsch. Meere, Kiel, p. 89, pl. 5, fig. 49.
Cells with cylindrical mantle and arched hemispherical valves. Diameter 12–38µ. In individuals with
auxospores (fig. 34-C, a–e), old cells varied from 13 to 24µ in diameter, auxospores from 33 to 38µ. Circle of
long slender setae at edge of valve. After cell division, while setae are enclosed within the girdle zone, they are
parallel to the pervalvar axis. When free, on one valve all radiate out in same direction from center of cell; on
other
71
Fig. 34-A. Corethron hystrix Hen. a, dividing cell; diameter, 30µ. b, dividing cell; diameter, 17µ. c, cell;
diameter, 32µ d, cell with chromatophores; diameter, 24µ.
72
Fig. 34-B. Corethron hystrix Hen. a, cell showing intercalary bands; diameter, 19µ. b, part of seta from
(a). c, valve view of cell; diameter, 12µ. d and e, two dividing cells; diameters, 18 and 19µ respectively.
73
Fig. 34-C. Corethron hystrix Hen. a–e, cells with auxospores; diameters of auxospore and of original
cell: a, 33µ, 14µ; b, 38µ; 14µ; c, 37µ, 13µ; d, 36µ, 16µ; e, 33µ, 15µ.
valve two types of setae are formed, longer ones of uniform width and approximately parallel to those of the first
valve, and shorter ones ending in an irregularly twisted knob. These shorter ones radiate forward. Intercalary
bands not usually visible in water, collarlike. Chromatophores numerous round or slightly elongated plates.
Closely related
74
to the Antarctic species C. criophilum (C. valdiviae). Hustedt (1930) distinguished them, but according to Gran
and Angst (1931), the question of their identity is still unsettled.
Oceanic. Fairly common off California, in Gulf of California, and north to Scotch Cap, Alaska. Never in
large numbers. North temperate species.
Genus XIV. LAUDERIA Cleve
1873. Bih. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 1, no. 11, p. 8.
Cells cylindrical. Valves rounded. Cells united in straight chains by very fine gelatinous threads, cells
either touching or separated. An unpaired, oblique, outwardly directed apiculus on each valve, and numerous
very small spinulae (see fig. C, 7, sp) or slime canals at the margin and over most of the surface. Center
of valve slightly concave. Intercalary bands numerous, collarlike, more or less conspicuous (fig. C, 7, ib).
Chromatophores numerous small plates. Nucleus more or less central, in a cytoplasmic cord which binds the
central parts of the valves together. Although the cell wall is thin, it has a distinct structure. The valve surface
is radially striated, the mantle surface of the intercalary bands delicately areolated.
Species: 35. L. borealis (fig. 35)
35. Lauderia borealis Gran
Figure 35
1900. Nyt Mag. Naturvid., vol. 38, p. 110, pl. 9, figs. 5–9.
Cells in thick, straight chains, touching by their valve surfaces. Valves slightly concave in the center, rounded
at the margins. Marginal spinulae straight with gelatinous straight, radiating, longer or shorter threads, the
longer reaching the adjacent cell. A single unpaired spine, thicker and more robust than the others, occurs
near the margin of the valve. Diameter of cells 28–47µ. Intercalary bands, as in general the entire cell wall,
comparatively delicate,
Fig. 35. Lauderia borealis Gran. a, cell shortly after division; diameter, 47µ. b, cell (note intercalary
bands); diameter, 31µ. c, part of cell illustrated in (b) showing sculpturing on intercalary bands. d, chain
with chromatophores grouped at ends of cells; diameter, 30µ.
75
indistinct in water except in older cells or on older valve. Mantle surface delicately areolated-punctated, puncta
in irregular rows. Intercalary bands with about 16 puncta in 10µ, irregularly arranged. No resting spores
known. Chromatophores small, lobed, grouped at ends of cell in strong light.
Neritic. Temperate species. Common but not abundant off California. Reported in Gulf of California and
north to Scotch Cap, Alaska.
Genus XV. SCHRÖDERELLA Pavillard
1913. Bull. Soc. Bot. France, vol. 60, p. 126.
Cells cylindrical with slightly convex valves, somewhat concave in the center. Chains straight. Cells
sometimes occurring singly. Distinct spine in the depression in center of valve which joins spine belonging to
adjacent cell. Margin surrounded by a row of small spinulae from each of which arise two gelatinous threads.
These diverge and join the corresponding
Fig. 36. Schröderella delicatula (H. Pér.) Pav. a, chain containing large cells formed by division of
the auxospore and normal cells; diameter of large cells, 34µ; diameter of small cells, 17µ. b, chain with
auxospore; diameter of auxospore, 34µ; diameter of chain, 18µ. c, part of chain with dividing auxospore;
diameter of auxospore, 42µ; diameter of other cells, 20µ. d, chain showing intercalary bands and method
of chain formation; diameter, 24µ. e, same chain as in (d), but shown in optical focus (note spines in
center depressions). f, ends of two cells shown in (d) and (e) exhibiting zigzag arrangement of connecting
threads.
76
thread of the next cell, thus forming a characteristic zigzag. Sometimes the threads either are straight or
appear to be straight. Intercalary bands numerous, forming incomplete hoops. Very small puncta on the bands.
Chromatophores small plates, strongly slit, usually with four straight ends. Auxospores elliptical, single, lying
in the girdle-band zone, and much greater in diameter than the mother cell. After the first divisions of the
auxospore, the colony often still hangs together so that a chain may contain groups of both large and small
cells (fig. 36, a). Resting spores also one in a cell but have the same diameter.
Species: 36. S. delicatula (fig. 36)
36. Schröderella delicatula (H. Péragallo) Pavillard
Figure 36
1888. H. Péragallo. Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Toulouse, vol. 22, p. 81, pl. 6, fig. 46 (Lauderia delicatula).
1913. Pavillard. Bull. Soc. Bot. France, vol. 60, p. 126.
Cells cylindrical. Valves more or less convex, sometimes almost flat, always with a depression in the middle.
Diameter 16–42µ. Cells bound in straight, more or less stiff or loose chains. Intercalary bands collarlike,
varying greatly in number. Mantle surface of the cell delicately areolated, 18–20 areolae in 10µ, sometimes
very difficult to see, arranged in a two-line system with the lines crossing each other. Marginal spines or threads
7–8 in 10µ. Resting spores and auxospores unknown.
Neritic. Distribution and abundance uncertain because of confusion with Lauderia borealis. Known to be
fairly common off southern California and in Gulf of California.
Genus XVI. DACTYLIOSOLEN Castracane
1886. Diat. Chall.-Exped., p. 75.
Cells cylindrical, living singly or united in long, stiff, closed chains by the flat valve surfaces. Valves circular,
without noticeable spines or processes, on the margin sometimes with indistinct little nodules. Intercalary bands
numerous, half-collar-shaped, somewhat spirally twisted and with their wedge-shaped thin ends fitting together
in a toothlike manner (see fig. C, 6, ib). Mantle surface with fine or coarse areolae. The ends of the intercalary
bands do not always lie in an even line in the pervalvar direction but sometimes form a spiral line. The girdle
band is frequently unilaterally displaced and considerably closer to the younger valve.
Species: 37. D. antarcticus (fig. 37)
38. D. mediterraneus (fig. 38)
37. Dactyliosolen antarcticus Castracane
Figure 37
Fig. 37. Dactyliosolen antarcticus Castr. a, part of cell shown in (b), lower half, intercalary bands;
diameter, 30µ. b, entire cell.
77
1½ to 2½ in 10µ, the free ends forming a spiral line around the pervalvar axis. Each intercalary band has a row
of large, usually quadrate or somewhat oval areolae, 5–7 in 10µ.
Oceanic. Temperate species. Found off southern California. Not uncommon but never abundant.
38. Dactyliosolen mediterraneus H. Péragallo
Figure 38
Fig. 38. Dactyliosolen mediterraneus H. Pér. a and b, parts of chains (note epiphytic flagellate,
Solenicola setigera, attached to girdle-band zone); diameters: a, 7µ; b, 10µ. c, structure of cell; diameter,
11µ. d, areolae on intercalary bands of cell shown in (b).
Neritic, sporadically oceanic. Widespread. Fairly common off southern California and in Gulf of California.
Genus XVII. LEPTOCYLINDRUS Cleve
1889. Pelag. Diat. Kattegat, p. 54.
Cells long, cylindrical, united into chains by whole valve surface. Valves flat, without spines or processes.
Intercalary bands present but very difficult to see. Cells thin-walled, hyaline, without visible sculpturing.
Chromatophores one or many roundish plates or granules. Resting spores known.
Species: 39. L. danicus (fig. 39)
Fig. 39. Leptocylindrus danicus Cl. a, chain; diameter, 10µ. b, chain with chromatophores; diameter,
8µ. c, part of another chain; diameter, 10µ.
78
1886. Castracane. Diat. Chall.-Exped., p. 74., pl. 29, fig. 4 (Rhizosolenia (µ) flaccida Castracane).
1892. H. Peragallo. Le Diatomiste, vol.1, p. 107, pl. 13, figs. 3, 4.
Cells typically cylindrical, one and a half to several times longer than broad, single or united in chains by
whole valve surface. Valve nearly flat, very slightly concave, with an irregular tooth at the margin. Diameter
30–53µ. Cell wall weakly siliceous, collapsing when dried, without visible sculpturing. Chromatophores lying
near the wall, round to biscuit-shaped, more or less lobed or cleft plates in large numbers, with one pyrenoid.
Nucleus more or less central.
Fig. 40. Guinardia flaccida (Castr.) H. Pér. a, cell with chromatophores; diameter, 30µ. b, part of a cell
(note intercalary bands); diameter, 47µ.
Neritic. South temperate species. Never Common off southern California. Present more commonly but
never abundant in Gulf of California.
79
1903. Bull. Soc. Sci. Arcachon, Sta. Biol., vol. 6, p. 49, pl. 1, figs. 9, 10.
Cells cylindrical with rounded ends, 12–20µ in diameter, 42–67µ in length. United in short straight chains.
Intercalary bands ring-shaped (collar-shaped) but difficult to see. Small spine present near center of valve,
fits into depression in adjacent cell. Chromatophores numerous small plates, distributed over entire cell wall.
Nucleus near wall. Cell wall very thin and weakly siliceous.
Neritic. North temperate to boreal species. Moderately common off California, but never in large numbers.
42. Rhizosolenia cylindrus Cleve
Figure 42
Fig. 41. Rhizosolenia fragilissima Berg. a, chain; diameter, 17µ b, part of a chain (note intercalary
bands); diameter, 14µ.
Fig. 42. Rhizosolenia cylindrus Cl. a, recently divided cells; diameter, 12µ. b, part of a cell, with
chromatophores; diameter, 8µ.
Fig. 43. Rhizosolenia bergonii H. Pér. a, b, and c, parts of three cells; diameters: a, 70µ; b, 38µ; c, 25µ.
d, apex of cell showing arrangement of sculpturing. e–g, cell showing auxospore formation. e, diameter
of cell, 23µ; of auxospore, 46µ. f, section to show method of connection of auxospore with mother cell.
g, apex of auxospore.
bands more delicate, with puncta in three crossing systems, 22–24 puncta in 10µ. Chromatophores numerous,
small. Auxospores formed at right angles to long (pervalvar) axis of cell (fig. 43, e–g). Diameter of cell with
auxospore 22µ; of auxospore 46µ.
Oceanic. Warmer-water species, south temperate or subtropical. Found off Lower California and in Gulf of
California. Fairly common but never abundant.
83
B. EURHIZOSOLENIAE
2. Annulatae
a) LAUDERIOIDEAE
44. Rhizosolenia delicatula Cleve
Figure 44
1900. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 32, no. 8, p. 28, fig. 11.
Cells cylindrical, with almost completely flat valves, rounded only slightly on margins. United in closely set,
straight chains. Cells 9–16µ in diameter, usually about three times as long. Intercalary bands usually difficult
to see, ring-shaped. Valve with marginal, short spine which fits into a corresponding furrow or depression on
the adjacent cell. Chromatophores two or several large plates, near the girdle wall, more or less crenated or
lobed.
Neritic. Temperate. Fairly common off California, abundant at times in Gulf of California.
45. Rhizosolenia stolterfothii H. Péragallo
Figure 45 (p. 84)
1888. Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Toulouse, vol. 22, p. 82, pl. 6, fig. 44.
Cells cylindrical, 6–30µ in diameter. Uniformly curved along pervalvar axis. United in curved chains, often
spiral. Valves flat, rounded at the edges. Strong spine on valve margin, fits into depression on adjacent cell.
Intercalary bands collarlike, numerous. Imbrication lines not always distinct, but very clear sometimes. Cell
wall weakly siliceous, without detectable structure. Chromatophores numerous, small, oval. Nucleus near
wall.
Neritic. Sometimes regarded as oceanic. Very wide-spread. Common and often abundant.
Fig. 44. Rhizosolenia delicatula Cl. a and b, two chains; diameters, 9 and 16µ respectively. c, part of
two cells showing intercalary bands; diameter, 11µ.
b) ROBUSTAE
46. Rhizosolenia robusta Norman
Figure 46 (p. 85)
Fig. 45. Rhizosolenia stolterfothii H. Pér. a, b, and c, three chains; diameters, 20, 15, and 6µ respectively.
d, cell showing intercalary bands; diameter, 23µ.
Oceanic. Widely distributed, especially in warm water. Frequently found off California but never common
or abundant.
wall thin, but more strongly siliceous than in most of the other species of this genus. Membrane delicately
punctated, puncta in three-line, self-crossing system (quincunx). Puncta on valve 19–20 in 10µ; on intercalary
bands 24–26 in 10µ. Chromatophores numerous, lying along the wall. Nucleus near the wall.
3. Genuinae
a) IMBRICATAE
47. Rhizosolenia imbricata Brightwell
1858. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci, vol. 6, p. 95, pl. 5, fig. 6.
Variety shrubsolei (Cleve) Schröder
Figure 47 (p.86)
1881. Cleve. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 18, no. 5, p. 26 (Rhizosolenia shrubsolei). 1906.
Schröder. Vierteljahrschr. naturforsch. Ges. Zürich, vol. 51, p. 346.
Cells cylindrical, 12–18µ in diameter, up to 575µ in length. Cells single or united in chains. Valves oblique,
pointed, the apical process hollow most of the way up, with
85
small wings at the base, regularly decreasing in size until the point is reached. Small wings run up about a
third of the spine, do not extend to valve itself. Intercalary bands numerous, scalelike in two long rows, each
band a triangular scale with the corner pointing so that they form an imbricating row on each side of the apex.
Intercalary bands with ribs running from the middle line fanlike toward the sides, on an average 17–18 in 10µ,
between the ribs coarsely lined with 24 cross lines in 10µ. Girdle bands and valves much more delicate. Girdle
bands with 19–22 pervalvar rows of lines and 25–28 puncta
Fig. 46. Rhizosolenia robusta Norm. a and b, same cell. a, narrow girdle view; b, broad girdle view;
widths: a, 55µ; b, 130µ. c and d, another cell. c, broad girdle view; d, narrow girdle view; widths:
c, 130µ; d, 48µ. e, apex and bristlelike point. f and g, a dividing cell. f, narrow girdle view; g, broad
girdle view; widths: f, 55µ; g, 103µ. h, recently divided cell; width, 120µ. i, sections of (h) showing
arrangement of sculpturing in corresponding regions (as indicated by A, B, C, and D).
86
Fig. 47. Rhizosolenia imbricata var. shrubsolei (Cl.) Schröd. a, side view of a cell; diameter, 17µ. b,
ventral view; diameter, 14µ. c, side view showing sculpturing; diameter, 15µ.
in 10µ, lines on the valves from the base toward the excentric point 20–22 in 10µ, with 26–30 puncta in 10µ.
Chromatophores numerous, small, lying near the cell wall. Nucleus near wall.
The variety is smaller in diameter than the type, and has somewhat more delicate sculpturing. The valve is
much more elongated than in R. imbricata. The variety has a more northerly distribution than the type.
Neritic. North temperate species. Fairly common off California and Lower California, and in the Gulf of
California. Never in large numbers.
87
b) STYLIFORMES
48. Rhizosolenia styliformis Brightwell
Figure 48-A
1858. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci, vol. 6, p. 95, pl. 5, fig. 5, a–d.
Cells cylindrical, never compressed. Valves obliquely pointed, more sharply than in R. imbricata var.
shrubsolei. Cells 20–70µ in diameter, 600–1050µ in length. Apical process pointed, with a long cavity
penetrating the tip of the valve. Two winglike expansions beginning on the valve, ending near base of process.
Valve with distinct mark for both spine and wings of valve of adjacent cell. Intercalary bands scalelike with
very fine reticulated sculpturing. Cell wall thin or moderately strong. Sculpturing in quincunx, 20–25 puncta in
10µ on intercalary bands, on valves 25–28 in 10µ. Chromatophores numerous, small, round. The alga Richelia
intercellularis, first described by Joh. Schmidt in 1901, is often found in and on the cells of R. styliformis.
Fig. 48-A. Rhizosolenia styliformis Brightw. a, ventral view of part of a cell; diameter, 70µ. b, side view
of same cell. c, side-ventral view of part of a cell; diameter, 20µ (note Richelia intercellularis near apex
of cell).
Fig. 48-B. Rhizosolenia styliformis var. longispina Hust. a, side view of part of a cell; diameter, 23µ. b,
dorsal view of same cell. c, apex of another cell.
Oceanic. North temperate species. Common off California, sometimes fairly numerous. Reported from Gulf
of California.
Variety longispina Hustedt
Figure 48-B
Fig. 49. Rhizosolenia setigera Brightw. a, entire cell; diameter, 15µ. b, part of a cell; diameter, 4µ. c,
two ends of a long cell (450µ); diameter, 5µ.
1904. Fauna Arctica, vol. 3, no. 3, p. 527, pl. 17, figs. 9–12 (form hiemalis Gran = R. hebetata Bailey).
Cells straight, 18–20µ in diameter, valves longitudinally drawn out; apical process thick, solid, except for
a small, hollow, rounded spine. Junction between scalelike intercalary bands distinct. Intercalary bands in
two dorsiventral rows alternating. Cell wall strongly siliceous, with distinct structure. Intercalary bands finely
punctated, puncta in quincunx, 24–26 in 10µ. On valves punctation coarser, 19–20 puncta in 10µ near base, in
broken lines and coarser near apex. Chromatophores small, numerous.
Usually a winter and cold-water form. Rarely seen more southerly than Alaska.
Form semispina (Hensen) Gran
Figure 50-B
1887. Hensen. 5. Ber. Komm. wissensch. Untersuch. deutsch. Meere, Kiel, p. 84, pl. 5, fig. 39
(Rhizosolenia semispina).
1904. Gran. Fauna Arctica, vol. 3, no. 3, p. 527. (Illus. in Gran, 1905, fig. 67, b.)
Valves longitudinally drawn out. Process hollow at base and ending in a long, curved, hairlike spine. General
construction in agreement with form hiemalis except smaller in
89
Fig. 50-A. Rhizosolenia hebetata form hiemalis Gran. a, entire cell; diameter, 18µ. b, end of cell
showing arrangement of sculpturing.
Fig. 50-B. Rhizosolenia hebetata form semispina (Hen.) Gran. a, part of a cell, ventral view; diameter,
7µ. b, side view of part of a cell; diameter, 5µ. c, end of cell showing, arrangement of punctation. d,
recently divided cells; diameter, 7µ.
diameter, 5–12µ. Cell wall much more weakly siliceous and with correspondingly more delicate structure.
Near apex of valve, 20–24 puncta in 10µ; nearer base finer, 25–27 in 10µ; on intercalary bands, 26–29 in 10µ.
Usually a warm-water and summer form. Common and often abundant off California, especially in July and
August. Reported in Gulf of California.
51. Rhizosolenia calcar avis M. Schultze
Figure 51 (p. 90)
1858. In Müller’s Archiv Anat., Phys. u. wissensch. Med. 1858, p. 339, pl. 13, figs. 5–10.
Cells rod-shaped cylindrical, like R. styliformis, but the valves not so oblique, more regularly conical, curved
at the apex. Cells 6–53µ in diameter, up to nearly 1 mm. in length.
90
Fig. 51. Rhizosolenia calcar avis M. Schultze. a, b, and c, three entire cells; diameters: a, 53µ; b, 42µ;
c, 18µ. d, part of a cell showing intercalary bands. e, process. f, valve and intercalary band showing
arrangement of punctation.
Intercalary bands scalelike, rhombic, in small individuals in two dorsiventral rows, in the widest forms
sometimes up to eight or more rows. Imbrication lines difficult to see. Process strong, gradually diminished in
size from the base to the point, curved like a claw. No wings on process. Cell wall thin and weakly siliceous.
Very delicately punctated. Puncta on valve 22–24 in 10µ; on intercalary bands 20–23 in 10µ. Chromatophores
small, numerous.
Oceanic, Warm-water species, subtropical to tropical. Common and even abundant at times, especially in
August, off southern California. Moderately abundant in Gulf of California in 1937.
c) ALATAE
52. Rhizosolenia alata Brightwell
Figure 52-A
1858. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci., vol. 6, p. 96, pl. 5, fig. 8.
Cells rod-shaped, cylindrical, straight; 7–18µ in diameter, up to 1 mm. in length. Valve shortly conical
ending in tubelike, more or less curved oblique process. Depression at base of tube into which apex of adjoining
cell fits. Intercalary bands scalelike, rhombic, in two dorsiventral
91
Fig. 52-A. Rhizosolenia alata Brightw. a, entire cell; diameter, 9µ. b, dividing cell; diameter, 11µ. c,
detail of (b), stage of division. d, cell ends of (e); diameter, 13µ. e, entire cell; diameter, 13µ. f, side
view; diameter, 12µ. g, arrangement of punctation on valve. h-l, stages in formation of auxospores.
92
rows. Cell wall thin, weakly siliceous. Finely striated. On valve 21–23 puncta in 10µ. None observed on
intercalary bands. Chromatophores numerous, small. Auxospores and resting spores known. Auxospores (fig.
52-A, h-l) growing out in the same plane as the main cell.
Oceanic, but often near the coast. Temperate species. Common off California and north to Alaska.
Sometimes abundant off southern California and common in the Gulf of California.
Form gracillima (Cleve) Grunow
Figure 52-B
1881. Cleve. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 18, no. 5, p. 26, pl. 6, fig. 78 (Rhizosolenia [alata var.]
gracillima).
1880–85. Grunow (as variety). In V. H. Syn., pl. 79, fig. 8.
Like the type, but narrower. Diameter 4–7µ. Production of auxospores bring it to same size as the type.
A coastal form, perhaps truly neritic. Usually in northern seas.
Fig. 52-B. Rhizosolenia alata form gracillima (Cl.) Grun. a, entire cell; diameter, 4µ. b, two ends of a
cell 428µ long; diameter, 5µ. c, side view of one end of a cell 4µ in diameter. d, ends of recently divided
cells; diameter, 6µ. e, entire cell with chromatophores; diameter, 7 µ.
Fig. 52-C. Rhizosolenia alata form indica (H. Pér.) Osten. Diameters: a, 54µ; b, 14µ; c, 16µ.
93
Fig. 52-D. Rhizosolenia alata form curvirostris Gran. a, b, and c, entire cells; diameters: a, 20µ; b, 22µ;
c, 22µ; d-e, ends of processes. f, process.
94
Fig. 52-E. Rhizosolenia alata form inermis (Castr.) Hust. Diameter, 13µ.
4. Squamosae
53. Rhizosolenia acuminata (H. Péragallo) Gran
Figure 53
1892. H. Péragallo. Le Diatomiste, vol. 1, p. 110, pl. 15, fig. 4 (Rhizosolenia temperei var. acuminata).
1905. Gran. Diat. Nord. Plankt., p. 50, fig. 59.
Cells straight, with a long conical valve. Diameter 165–172µ. Valve with a small process. Process with a
small elongated hollow at the base, no wings. Intercalary bands scalelike, in at least four and usually many
rows. Cell wall strong. Chromatophores small, numerous.
Oceanic. Subtropical or temperate species. Reported from Gulf of California.
Fig. 53. Rhizosolenia acuminata (H. Pér.) Gran. a, part of a cell; diameter, 172µ b, process.
Fig. 54. Rhizosolenia castracanei H. Pér. a, side view of part of a cell; diameter, 300 µ. b, dorsal view;
diameter, 280µ. c, side-ventral view; diameter, 140µ. d, section of intercalary band showing areolation.
e, section of intercalary bands showing arrangement of sculpturing.
Pavillard’s (1924–1925) revision of the classification within the genus Bacteriastrum has been followed:
I. Isomorpha. Terminal setae of like construction and form on both ends of chain (isomorphic). Setae on
both ends directed either outward from chain axis or toward the center. The two outer valves are therefore
mirror images.
Species: 55. B. delicatulum (fig. 55)
56. B. hyalinum (fig. 56-A)
B. hyalinum var. princeps (fig. 56-B)
57. B. elongatum (fig. 57)
II. Sagittata. Terminal setae on either end of chain different in form and direction (dimorphic). Setae of
posterior valve directed outward from chain and running nearly parallel to chain axis, forming a bell-shaped
space. Setae of other or anterior valve curved toward inner part of chain, or on their ends turned back toward
the out-side, or in general deviating little from the valvar plane.
Species: 58. B. comosum (fig. 58)
The position of the forked part of the inner setae is also of importance in classification. The forking may
be parallel to the pervalvar axis (branches in a plane parallel to the chain axis) or in the direction of the valvar
plane (branches transverse to the chain axis).
Pavillard has shown that B. varians is a tropical species. It may occur occaionally off Lower California but
undoubtedly most records of its presence off the California region refer to B. delicatulum or B. hyalinum.
I ISOMORPHA
55. Bacteriastrum delicatulum Cleve
Figure 55
1897. Fifteenth Ann. Rep. Fish. Board for Scotland, pt. 3, p. 298, fig. 16.
Cells cylindrical, 6–15µ in diameter. Chains long, straight. Setae 6–12, with strong, long basal part.
Apertures usually relatively large. The bifurcation plane of inner setae lies in the valvar plane, transverse
to chain axis. Forked parts slightly curved, smooth or somewhat wavy. Terminal setae of both ends directed
toward the inside of the chain and in front view of the valve similarly curved. Stronger than inner setae and
with fine spines arranged spirally. Chromatophores small, numerous, distributed along cell wall. Oceanic.
Temperate species. Fairly common in eastern Pacific.
56. Bacteriastrum hyalinum Lauder
Figure 56-A
1864. Trans. Micr. Soc., N.S., vol. 12; p. 6, pl. 3, fig. 7.
Cells cylindrical, 14-28µ in diameter. Pervalvar axis often shorter than diameter. Chains long, straight
or slightly curved. Apertures narrow but distinct. Inner setae 12-25 on each valve, with short basal part.
Bifurcations in pervalvar axis (parallel to chain axis) giving cells a hairy appearance. Forked parts slightly
curved and usually weakly twisted. Terminal setae differ little from those of B. delicatulum, umbrella-shaped,
stronger than inner setae, and with spirally arranged tiny spines as in previous species. Chromatophores small,
numerous. Resting spores in pairs in adjacent cells, one in each cell. With high arched valves, the primary
valve slightly contracted above the base, with fine spines when fully formed, smooth in process of formation.
Secondary valve similarly rounded and smooth.
Neritic. Probably much confused with B. varians. Common and frequently abundant in eastern Pacific
especially in April, May, and June.
Fig. 55. Bacteriastrun delicatulum Cl. a and b, parts of two different chains in girdle view; diameters:
a, 6µ; b, 15µ. c, valve view showing inner setae. d, valve view showing terminal setae.
Fig. 56-A. Bacteriastrum hyalinum Laud. a, girdle view of part of a chain with resting spores; diameter,
24µ. b, girdle view of terminal cell and setae; diameter, 17µ. c, girdle view of a typical chain; diameter,
28µ, d, valve view of terminal cell showing terminal setae; diameter, 20µ.
98
Fig. 56-B. Bacteriastrum hyalinum var. princeps (Castr.) Ikari. a, girdle view of part of a chain; diameter,
18µ. b, inner setae. c, part of a terminal seta.
Fig. 57. Bacteriastrum elongatum Cl. a and b, parts of two chains in girdle view; diameters: a, 5µ; b,
10µ. c, terminal cell of chain shown in (b).
99
Fig. 58. Bacteriastrum comosum Pav. a, posterior cells and setae of a chain in girdle view; diameter,
12µ. b, entire chain, girdle view; diameter, 17µ.
100
with deep furrow, with the setae, usually eight, sometimes six, curved umbrella-like toward the inner part of
the chain. Posterior valve also with furrow, the setae stronger than the rest, and with spirally arranged little
spines. Posterior setae bell-shaped, with ends slightly converging toward chain axis.
Oceanic. Subtropical species. Reported only occasionally off southern California.
Genus XXI. CHAETOCEROS Ehrenberg
1845. Ber. Akad. Wiss. Berl. 1844, p. 198.
Cells with oval section to almost or rarely completely circular in valve view; in broad girdle view
quadrangular with straight sides and concave, flat, or slightly convex ends. Valve with a more or less flat
end surface or valve surface (see fig. H, 1, 2, 3, vs) and a cylindrical part or valve mantle (fig. H, 1, 2, vm)
which are bound together without a seam. A long thick or thin seta, bristle or awn (fig. H, 1, 2, 3, s), at each
end of the long or apical axis (fig. H, 1 and 3, A) of the valve on the corners. The opposite setae of neighboring
cells touch one another near their origin, usually directly or sometimes by a bridge, and fuse firmly at a point
near their base (fig. H, 1, bs) holding the cells in chains, usually with large or small apertures or foramina
(fig. H, 1, a) between the cells. Basal portion of the setae parallel to the pervalvar axis (fig. H, 1 and 2, P) or
directed diagonally outward with the outer portion frequently perpendicular to the axis of the chain. In most
species the length of the chain is limited by the formation of special end cells, terminal setae (fig. H, 1 and
2, ts), usually shorter and thicker and more nearly parallel to the chain axis than the others. In relatively few
species are cells solitary.
Cell wall formed of two valves and one or two girdle bands (fig. H, 1 and 2, vs, vm, g). Two frequently
unequally developed girdle bands always present in most species. Intercalary bands present in some species
(fig. C, 8, ib; fig. 79), usually difficult to see without special preparations.
Cytoplasm (protoplast) either forms a thin layer along the cell wall or fills the greater part of the cell.
Nucleus against the cell wall or central. Chromatophores vary greatly in number, size, form, and position in
different species; may be one to several, small or large, but are constant for a given species and consequently
indispensable for species demarcation. In many species pyrenoids are distinctly visible.
Resting spores formed in most neritic species. Only one spore formed in a vegetative cell, usually in
cylindrical part near the girdle band of the mother cell, in some species near the cell end. Free ends of spores
often armed with spines or spicules. Each spore with two valves, but only primary valve provided with a valve
mantle. Younger resting spores often smooth. If spore lies near end of cell, one valve may be in common with
that of mother cell, with valve mantle rudimentary and setae shorter and thicker than in vegetative cells. Such
spores always in pairs; formed in adjacent cells simultaneously.
Auxospores known in only a few species. Contents of cell empty laterally and form a large globule or bladder
within which the new daughter cell is formed.
Microspores known in several species. Formed by repeated divisions of nucleus and cytoplast. Contain
organized chromatophores. Locomotion observed in some species.
Great variations may be observed in chains of the same species from different localities and at different times
of the year.
The genus Chaetoceros includes the greatest number of species of the truly planktonic diatoms, and is by far
the most important one in abundance of species and number of cells in the temperate and subtropical eastern
Pacific waters. In all, about one hundred forty species are recorded in Mills (1933). There are nearly fifty
species included in the Scripps Institution records. A small number of species are oceanic, but the greater
number are neritic. No entirely fresh-water species are known.
101
The genus has been divided into two subgenera Phaeoceros and H yalochaete. These two groups are
subdivided into sections. The classification is as follows:
Subgenus 1. Phaeoceros Gran, 1897 (Den Norske Nordh.-Exped. 1876–1878, Bot. Protoph., p. 10). Almost
entirely large robust species with strong, thick, and in many species very long setae usually armed with longer
or shorter little spines. Numerous chromatophores, globoid, along cell walls and also crowded in interior of
cells and in the setae. Mostly oceanic.
Sec. I. Atlantica Ostenfeld, 1903. Direction of all setae alike in one plane except terminal setae which
are distinctly different from the others. Small spine usually present in center of valve. Aperture between cells
wide.
Species: 59. C.atlanticus (fig. 59-A)
C. atlanticus form audax (fig. 59-B, a)
C. atlanticus var. skeleton (fig. 59-B, b-c)
C. atlantious var. neapolitana (fig. 59-B, d-e)
60. C. dichaeta (fig. 60)
Sec. II. Borealia Ostenfeld, 1903. Setae usually diverging in all directions, the directions on one valve
often differing from those on the other. Terminal setae not distinctly different from others. Apertures between
cells narrow. Usually no spine in center of valve.
Species: 61. C. eibenii (fig. 61)
62. C. coarctatus (fig. 62)
63. C. tetrastichon (fig. 63)
64. C. dadayi (fig. 64)
65. C. danicus (fig. 65)
66. C. concavicornis. (fig. 66. a-c)
C. concavicornis form volans (fig. 66, d)
67. C. convolutus (fig. 67)
68. C. peruvianus (fig. 68, a–c)
C. peruvianus form gracilis (fig. 68, d-f)
69. C. pendulus (fig. 69)
Subgenus 2. Hyalochaete Gran, 1897 (Den Norske Nordh-Exped. 1876–1878, Bot. Protoph., p. 11).
Chromatophores one or several plates, more seldom numerous granules. Setae usually thin, only exceptionally
with chromatophores in them. Nucleus and chromatophores near the wall. Chiefly neritic. Resting spores
known in most of the species.
A. Each Cell with More than Two Chromatophores
Sec. I. Oceanica Ostenfeld, 1903; emended by Lebour, 1930. Chromatophores rather large, 6–10. Setae
coalesced along a short portion of their length. No resting spores known. Oceanic.
Species: 70. C. decipiens (figs. 70-A; 70-B, a-b)
C. decipiens form singularis (fig. 70-B, c-d)
Sec. II. Dicladia (Ehrenberg) Gran, 1905; emended by Lebour, 1930. Like Oceanica, but with setae not
always coalesced for a portion of their length. Resting spores with two horns armed with small branches on
primary valves. Neritic.
Species: 71. C. lorenzianus (fig. 71)
Sec. III. Cylindrica Ostenfeld, 1903. Valves nearly circular. Apertures very narrow. Chromatophores
small, numerous. Terminal setae not thicker than others. Resting spores about middle of the cells, smooth or
with spines.
Species: 72. C. teres. (fig. 72)
73. C. lauderi (fig. 73)
102
Sec. IV. Compressa Ostenfeld, 1903. Cells compressed. Apertures usually moderately large. Terminal
setae little different from others. Inner setae of two forms, thinner normal setae and intercalary thickened and
twisted ones. Chromatophores numerous. Resting spores smooth or with a row of spicules.
Species: 74. C. compressus (fig. 74)
B. Each Cell, with One or Two Chromatophores
Sec. V. Protuberantia Ostenfeld, 1903. Two chromatophores, each with a large pyrenoid situated in a
protuberance in the middle of the valve surface. Resting spores with two long horns.
Species: 75. C. didymus (fig. 75-A)
C. didymus var. protuberans (fig. 75-B, a)
C. didymus var. anglica (fig. 75-B, b-c)
Sec. VI. Constricta Ostenfeld, 1903. Chromatophores one or two. Cells more or less constricted. Valve
mantle on girdle-band margin with a concave channel-like sulcus or groove. Girdle at least one-third the length
of the cell. Terminal setae mostly thicker than the others. Resting spores about the middle of the cell with
numerous spines on both valves.
Species: 76. C. constrictus (fig. 76)
77. C. vanheurcki (fig. 77)
Sec. VII. Stenocincta Ostenfeld, 1903. One chromatophore. Girdle narrow, not one-third the length of
the cell. Apertures rather narrow. Terminal setae thicker than others, curved and for the most part diverging
greatly. Resting spores about middle of cell, with numerous spines on both valves; the two valves not essentially
different-at most the spines of one limited to the middle of the valve, on the other uniformly distributed.
Species: 78. C. affinis (figs. 78-A(1) , 78-A(2) )
C. affinis var. circinalis (fig. 78-B)
C. affinis var. willei (fig. 78-C)
79. C. costatus (fig. 79)
Sec. VIII. Laciniosa Ostenfeld, 1903. Chromatophores one or two. Girdle rather long. Apertures large.
Terminal setae usually thicker than the others, not diverging greatly. Resting spores smooth or with minute
spines on primary valve, not in the middle of the cell.
Species: 80. C. laciniosus (fig. 80)
81. C. pelagious (fig. 81)
82. C. brevis (fig. 82)
Sec. IX. Diadema (Ehrenberg) Ostenfeld, 1903; emended by Gran, 1905. One chromatophore. Chains
long with conspicuous terminal setae. Primary valve of resting spore with branched process or crown of spines,
or sometimes smooth. Occasionally both valves armed.
Species: 83. C. subsecundus (fig. 83)
84. C. seiracanthus (fig. 84)
85. C. holsaticus (fig. 85)
86. C. difficilis (fig. 86)
Sec. X. Diversa Ostenfeld, 1903. Short rigid chains. Inner setae of two kinds. Terminal setae less spread
out than a special pair of setae in middle of cell. One chromatophore.
Species: 87. C. diversus (fig. 87)
88. C. laevis (fig. 88)
89. C. messanensis (figs. 89-A, 89-B)
Sec. XI. Brevicatenata Gran, 1905. One or two chromatophores. Short straight chains, few joints.
Terminal setae very thin, more or less different from others. Mostly small or very small forms.
Species: 90. C. similis (fig. 90)
91. C. wighami (fig. 91)
92. C. perpusillus (fig. 92)
103
Sec. XII. Curviseta Ostenfeld, 1903; emended by Gran, 1905. One chromatophore. Setae curved, all bent
in one direction. Chains usually curved, without special end cells.
Species: 93. C. curvisetus (fig. 93)
94. C. pseudocurvisetus (fig. 94)
95. C. debilis (fig. 95)
Sec. XIII. Anastomosantia Ostenfeld, 1903, Setae united by a bridge.
Species: 96. C. anastomosans (fig. 96)
Sec. XIV. Furcellata Ostenfeld, 1903. One chromatophore. Terminal setae not differentiated. Resting
cells excentrically arranged in mother cell, lying close together two and two, with thick coalesced setae; with
smooth valves or with short spines.
Species: 97. C. radicans (fig. 97)
98. C. cinctus (fig. 98)
99. C. tortissimus (fig. 99)
Sec. XV. Socialia Ostenfeld, 1903. Chains curved, embedded in mucilage, forming irregularly spherical
colonies. One chromatophore. Resting spores smooth or with small spines.
Species: 100. C. socialis (fig. 100)
Sec. XVI. Simplicia Ostenfeld, 1903. Cells living singly or two or three together. In case of chain
formation without differentiated terminal setae.
Species: 101. C. gracilis (fig. 101)
102. C. vistulae (fig. 102)
Subgenus 1. PHAEOCEROS
Section I. Atlantica
59. Chaetoceros atlanticus Cleve
Figure 59-A (p. 104)
1873. Bih. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 1, no. 13, p. 11, pl. 2, fig. 8.
Chains straight, flat, not twisted, 10–26µ broad (breadth = length along apical axis of cell). Cells in broad
girdle view oblong. Valves with a small spine in the center of each cell. Apertures between cells hexagonal,
large, but smaller than cells. Valve mantle rather low, one-third the length of cell or less, making three zones
nearly equal. Distinct constriction at suture between mantle and girdle. Setae arising slightly within valve
margin, base narrow, then usually widened and later tapered. Terminal setae always shorter than others, at
first diagonal, farther out bent in so that points are about parallel to chain axis. Inner setae usually almost
straight, approximately in apical plane. In some specimens all setae, particularly terminals, definitely clubbed
(fig. 59-A, c).
Oceanic. Typically northern, arctic and boreal, but occasionally found off southern California. Never
abundant.
Form audax (Schütt) Gran
Figure 59-B, a (p. 105)
1895. Schütt. Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., vol. 13, p. 47, fig. 25, a, b (Chaetoceros audax).
1904. Gran. Fauna Arctica, vol. 3, no. 3, p. 529, pl. 17, fig. 8.
Occurs singly. With setae more curved than in the type and inclining toward one another at their extremities.
According to Hustedt (1930, p. 648), may be only a transient stage and a starting point for a new chain of C.
atlanticus rather than a separate form and consequently not entitled to an independent name. Doubt remains,
however, concerning the origin of this single cell. Width 22µ.
Rare. Found in Alaskan waters.
104
Fig. 59-A. Chaetoceros atlanticus Cl. a, entire chain, broad girdle view; width 18µ. b, end cell of chain
shown in (a). c, part of a chain with clubbed setae (from Scotch Cap, Alaska); width, 15µ.
Fig. 59-B. a, Chaetoceros atlanticus form audax (Schütt) Gran; width, 22µ. b and c, C. atlanticus var.
skeleton (Schütt) Hust. b, chain in broad girdle view; width, 17µ. c, recently divided cell; width, 26µ. d
and e, C. atlanticus var. neapolitana (Schröd.) Hust. d, chain in broad girdle view; width, 9µ. e, chain
in broad girdle view; width, 6µ.
59-B, d) or without (fig. 59-B, e) a small spine in the center. Hustedt (1930) shows a spine in his original
drawing, figure 366b, but no spine in figure 366a (after Schröder, 1900) or figure 366c (after Gran and Yendo,
1914).
More southerly in distribution than type. Reported in numbers up to 34,000 cells per liter off southern
California in August. Also abundant in February and March.
106
Fig. 60. Chaetoceros dichaeta Ehr. Chain in broad girdle view; width, 13µ.
Reported off southern California usually from February to May, occasionally in August. Not common.
Oceanic. Temperate species.
Section II. Borealia
61. Chaetoceros eibenii Grunow
Figure 61
1880–85. In V. H. Syn., pl. 82, figs. 9, 10.
Cells cylindrical, broadly elliptical in valve view. Chains straight, not twisted, 25–50µ broad. Apertures
rather flat, hexagonal. Valve surface flat; mantle moderately low, one-third the length of cell or less with
shallow constriction at suture with girdle. Valves with minute, hardly visible spine in center. Setae arising
from near corner of cell, crossing each other very near bases, curved outward from apical plane, half of them
nearly parallel to transapical axis. Setae
Fig. 61. Chaetoceros eibenii Grun. a, chain in broad girdle view; width, 25µ. b, section of a seta showing
fine striations.
107
armed with minute spines, farther out with fine striations, 20–22 in 10µ. Setae reported as hexagonal in cross
section by Meunier (1913), four-sided by Hustedt (1930). Found here to be hexagonal. (See fig. C, 8.)
Neritic. Not common. Recorded rarely off southern California and Lower California.
62. Chaetoceros coarctatus Lauder
Figure 62
1864. Trans. Micr. Soc., N.S., vol. 12, p. 79, pl. 8, fig. 8.
Cells cylindrical, elliptical in valve view. Chains long, robust in appearance, with two ends markedly
different, 30–44µ wide. Apertures very small. Valve surface flat, with
Fig. 62. Chaetoceros coarctatus Laud. a, entire chain (note attached Vorticella oceanica); width, 33µ.
b, section of inner seta, midway in chain. c, tip of posterior terminal seta.
rather high mantle, one-third to two-thirds the apical axis. More or less deep but always distinct constriction at
suture between mantle and girdle band. Posterior terminal setae large, strongly curved, heavily spined, shorter
than others; anterior terminal setae less robust, curved toward posterior end, spined less heavily; setae in center
of chain curved like anterior terminal setae, spined. Setae with rows of fine puncta running lengthwise visible
usually only on posterior terminal setae where they occur in double rows. Usually found with a species of
Vorticella (probably Vorticella oceanica) attached, sometimes in large numbers.
108
Oceanic. Reported off Lower California in latitude 27°250 north. Not common. A tropical or subtropical
species.
63. Chaetoceros tetrastichon Cleve
Figure 63
1897. Treat. phytopl. Atl. trib., p. 22, pl. 1, fig. 7.
Chains very short, usually three sometimes four cells long, not twisted, 18–20µ wide. Apertures very small
or almost absent. Valve surface flat with moderately high mantle
Fig. 63. Chaetoceros tetrastichon Cl. a, entire chain, broad girdle view; width, 20µ. b, entire chain
(found off Lower California); width, 18µ. c, section of posterior terminal seta of (b).
(one-third to one-half the length along apical axis). Shallow sulcus at suture between mantle and girdle. Setae
arising from margin of valve, curved outward, almost at right angles to chain, toward ends turned nearly parallel
to chain axis. Posterior terminal setae lie nearly in chain axis. All setae nearly equal in size, delicately striated,
with spirally arranged spines. Appear to be more heavily spined in warmer waters (as in fig. 63, b) off Lower
California (about lat. 24° 400 N.), than off southern California. Often found with Tintinnus inquilinus attached
to chain.
Oceanic. Tropical and south temperate species. Not common.
109
Fig. 64. Chaetoceros dadayi Pav. a, entire chain; width, 15µ (note Tintinnus inquilinus attached). b,
section of posterior seta.
Very similar to C. tetrastichon, in general differentiated only by the formation and direction of the setae.
Chains short and straight, usually of three cells, 10–15µ wide. Apertures very narrow or almost lacking. Setae
arising from valve corners without a basal part. On one side of chain setae very short and rudimentary, on the
other side well developed, very long, and with fine spines. The two setae of the outer cell run toward one cell
end; of the inner setae half are directed toward one end of the chain, half toward the other. Also usually found
with Tintinnus inquilinus attached.
Oceanic. Tropical and south temperate. Rare. Possibly more common off southern California than C.
tetrastichon.
65. Chaetoceros danicus Cleve
Figure 65 (p. 110)
1889. Pelag. Diat. Kattegat, p. 55.
Cells usually living singly, occasionally in short chains, with very small or no apertures. Width 7–15µ. Valve
surface flat, mantle high (about one-third to two-thirds apical axis), with distinct groove on margin near girdle
band. Girdle zone rudimentary. Setae arising near edge of valve outside apical plane, extending perpendicular
to pervalvar or chain axis, then directed obliquely toward sides of apical plane so that they form a cross in valve
view. Small spines on outer portio of setae.
Neritic. North temperate. Never very common off southern California. In June, 1923, recorded as occurring
in numbers up to 8,000 cells per liter.
66. Chaetoceros concavicornis Mangin
Figure 66, a-c (p. 111)
1917. Compt. rend. séances Acad. Sci., vol. 164, pp. 704 and 770, figs. 5(I), 6, 7.
Described under Chaetoceros criophilus Gran, 1905, Diat. Nord. Plankt., p. 71, fig. 85.
Cells in straight broad chains 12–30µ wide, or single cells. Valves unlike; upper valve with higher cylindrical
valve mantle, without a notch at suture, rounded surface, and setae springing from near the center; lower valve
with a lower mantle, flat surface, and setae springing from near the margin. Girdle zone rudimentary, but
distinct zone formed before
110
Fig. 65. Chaetoceros danicus Cl. a, chain in broad girdle view; width, 7µ. b, single cell showing
chromatophores; width, 13µ. c, section of seta of cell shown in (b).
cell division. Setae thin at their bases, thicker outward, all bent toward lower end of chain, curving inward
so that outside outline is concave; with small spines, more outstanding farther out. Apertures always distinct,
broad above, narrow below.
Oceanic. Boreal-arctic form. Fairly common but not abundant off southern California and northward.
Form volans (Schütt) Hustedt
Figure 66, d
1895. Schütt. Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., vol. 13, p. 45, fig. 20 (Chaetoceros volans).
1930. Hustedt. Kieselalgen, pt. 1, p. 666, fig. 377.
Differs from the type mainly in the direction of the setae of the arched valve. Setae like those in type at
base, then bent around semicircularly, for a short distance turned downward, then turned sharply outward, and
from there turned almost at right angles to the chain axis. Cells usually solitary, occasionally in short chains.
In addition the setae are more slender than in the type, and usually less strongly spined at the base.
More southerly than the type. Common but never abundant.
67. Chaetoceros convolutus Castracane
Figure 67 (p. 112)
1886. Diat. Chall.-Exped., p. 78, text fig.
Chains straight or more or less passively bent, 15–23µ broad. Valves unlike, upper rounded, lower flat.
Valve mantle about one-third the height of cell, middle third of cell being girdle zone. Definite conspicuous
notch between valve mantle and girdle. Setae relatively thin, arising near center of valve on the upper, near the
margin on the lower. From starting point outward, setae curve toward opposite side, from point of fusion all
more or
111
Fig. 66. a-c, Chaetoceros concavicornis Mang. a and b, two chains, broad girdle view; widths: a, 18µ;
b, 28µ c, part of a chain; width, 23µ. d, c. concavicornis form volans (Schütt) Hust., solitary cell; width,
16µ.
less strongly bent toward lower end of chain. Armed with slender spines but less strongly than C. concavicornis.
Apertures between cells partly or wholly covered by the setae.
Oceanic. Arctic and boreal form. Recorded frequently off southern California from late February to middle
of June. As many as 1,500,000 cells per liter recorded in one catch, between 100,000 and 500,000 cells per
liter being not uncommon.
112
Fig. 67. Chaetoceros convolutus Castr. a, entire chain, broad girdle view; width, 23µ. b, section of a
seta from chain shown in (a). c, short chain, broad girdle view; width, 18µ. d, chain with setae close to
cells; width, 16µ.
113
Fig. 68. a-c, Chaetoceros peruvianus Brightw. a, single cell; width, 18µ. b, dividing cell; width, 32µ. c,
section of a seta of (a). d-f, C. peruvianus form gracilis (Schröd.) Hust. d, entire cell; width, 15µ. e, cell
shown in (d). f, section of seta of same cell.
Oceanic. In south temperate to warmer seas. Occasionally recorded in large numbers in August (up to
900,000 cells per liter) off southern California.
114
Fig. 69. Chaetoceros pendulus Karst. a, entire cell, broad girdle view; width, 18µ. b, same cell as in
(a), more highly magnified. c, entire cell (note chromatophores); width, 11µ. d, same cell as in (c), more
highly magnified. e, another cell; width, 11µ.
115
Subgenus 2. HYALOCHAETE
Section I. Oceanica
70. Chaetoceros decipiens Cleve
Figure 70-A; figure 70-B, a, b
1873. Bih. Kongl. Svensk. Vet-Akad. Handl., vol. 1, no. 13, p. 11, pl. 1, fig. 5.
Cells 9-84µ wide, four-cornered in broad girdle view, with sharp corners touching those of adjacent cell.
Chains straight, stiff, more or less flattened, usually many-celled. Apertures varying in size and shape according
to season of year: in winter small, linear to lanceolate; in summer and autumn larger, elliptical or circular. Setae
without a basal portion, arising
Fig. 70-A. Chaetoceros decipiens Cl. a, entire chain, broad girdle view; width, 22µ. b, part of a
chain; width, 10µ. c, terminal cell and setae of a chain; width, 10µ. d, part of a chain (note large setae
resembling terminal setae in center of chain); width, 42µ.
116
Fig. 70-B. a and b, Chaetoceros decipiens Cl. a, entire chain (note sculpturing similar to that found in
C. lorenzianus on terminal setae); width, 30µ. b, part of a wide chain; width, 84µ. c and d, C. decipiens
form singularis Gran. c, entire cell; width, 12µ. d, cell shown in (c), more highly magnified.
at corners of valves perpendicular to chain axis, fusing together in pairs for some distance, the fused portion
two or three times as long as diameter of setae. Terminal setae shorter and thicker than others, first directed
obliquely outward, then bent so that outer half is nearly parallel to chain axis. Setae without special sculpturing
or with very fine spines and puncta. Sometimes with dots near the extremities. Occasionally so heavily
punctated they resemble those of C. lorenzianus. Chromatophores 4–10 per cell. No resting spores known.
Oceanic. Arctic and boreal species. Abundant off southern California. Over 1,500,000 cells per liter
recorded in May, 1918; about 500,000 cells per liter not uncommon. Large numbers frequently present from
middle of March through early June.
117
Fig. 71. Chaetoceros lorenzianus Grun. a, typical chain, broad girdle view; width, 32µ. b, chain with
long, narrow cells; width, 7µ. c, section of inner seta. d, section of terminal seta. e, chain with resting
spores in process of formation; width, 24µ. f, chain with resting spores; width, 30µ.
118
Fig. 72. Chaetoceros teres Cl. Chain in broad girdle view; width, 34µ.
Fig. 73. Chaetoceros lauderi Ralfs. a, chain in broad girdle view; width, 24µ. b, primary valve of resting
spore; width, 18µ.
119
Fig. 74. Chaetoceros compressus Laud. a, typical chain, with thickened setae, broad girdle view;
width, 7µ. b, same chain as in (a), narrow girdle view. c, chain containing resting spores in process of
formation; width, 11µ. d, resting spore; width, 12µ. e, another resting spore; width, 12µ. f, chain with
three auxospores; width of chain, 10µ; width of auxospore, 23µ, g, auxospore from chain shown in (f).
h, chain probably formed from auxospore; width, 26µ.
120
those of adjacent cells. Valves slightly convex, or flat. Chains straight, with cells more or less twisted about
the axis of the chain. Apertures four- or six-sided, slightly curved in the middle, more or less wide, sometimes
only a slit. Setae arising within the margin of the valve, basal part always distinct, outer part perpendicular to
chain axis, and then bent. Setae delicate except for some pairs often differentiated, usually near center of chain.
These setae are shorter than the others, thickened, twisted and directed toward one end of chain almost parallel
to chain axis. Chromatophores small, 4–20 in each cell. Resting spores in the middle of mother cell or at one
end, with a thick girdle band fused to it; smooth, without row of small spines on upper margin in primary valve
as recorded by Gran.
Neritic. Boreal to south temperate species. Very important species off California and Lower California
coasts and in Gulf of California (Cupp and Allen, 1938). Very abundant off southern California from March
through June and in some years again in November and December.
Auxospore formation was observed in this species by Meunier (1910) in Arctic material. SchÜtt (1893)
figured auxospores of C. medium (a synonym of C. compressus), formed perpendicular to the chain. These
closely resemble the chain shown in figure 74, h, which is separated, however, from the parent chain. Figure
74, f shows a chain with three auxospores. The chain appears to belong to C. compressus. The auxospores
formed are approximately the same breadth as the chain in figure 74, h. Renee Le Blanc (1935) figured a chain
with two auxospores which she placed in the species C. pseudobreve (synonym of C. brevis). The auxospores
in her drawing and those in figure 74, f show a marked resemblance.
Fig. 75-A. Chaetoceros didymus Ehr. a, typical chain, broad girdle view; width, 24µ. b, section of chain
showing beginning of formation of resting spores; width, 32µ. c and d, resting spores almost completely
formed, still within parent cells. e, typical resting spores free from parent cells.
121
Section V. Protuberantia
75. Chaetoceros didymus Ehrenberg
Figure 75-A
1846. Ber. Akad. Wiss. Berl. 1845, p. 75; 1854, Mikrogeol., pl. 35A, fig. XVII, 5; fig. XVIII, 4.
Chains straight, 12–34µ wide. Cells four-cornered in broad girdle view, with concave surfaces. Apertures
large, constricted in the middle. Valves with a semicircular protuberance in the center, visible in broad girdle
view. Setae arising from corners of cells, crossing at their base or farther out, sometimes far outside the chain;
in the type crossing almost at the base. Chromatophores two per cell, pressed against the valves, each with
a pyrenoid located in the protuberance. Resting spores in pairs together, with short, thick setae and smooth
valves, formed inside special mother cells without the central protuberance.
Neritic. South temperate species. Common, sometimes abundant off California and Lower California.
Variety protuberans (Lauder) Gran and Yendo
Figure 75-B, a
1864. Lauder. Trans. Micr. Soc., N.S., vol. 12, pl. 8, fig. 11 (Chaetoceros protuberans). 1914. Gran and
Yendo. Vidensk. Skrifter. I. Mat.-Naturv. Kl. 1913, no. 8, p. 12, fig. 5.
Fig. 75-B. a, Chaetoceros didymus var. protuberans (Laud.) Gran and Yendo. Chain, 7µ wide, b and
c, C. didymus var. anglica (Grun.) Gran. b, typical chain; width, 32µ. c, chain with cells more nearly
square, in broad girdle view; width, 14µ.
122
Resembles the type closely. Terminal setae as a rule thicker than others, more strongly divergent than in
type, convex toward outside, U-shaped. Setae usually crossing farther out from chain than in type. Rare.
Variety anglica (Grunow) Gran
Figure 75-B, b, c
1880–85. Grunow. In V. H. Syn., pl. 82, fig. 3 (Chaetoceros furcellatus var. anglica).
1905. Gran. Diat. Nord. Plankt., p. 80, fig. 95.
Differs from the type in shape of apertures. The thin, weakly siliceous setae cross each other far outside
chain, producing wide apertures.
Found usually in warm coastal waters. Reported from Gulf of California and off coast of Lower California.
Not common.
Section VI. Constricta
76. Chaetoceros constrictus Gran
Figure 76
1897. Den Norske Nordh.-Exped. 1876–1878, Bot. Protoph., p. 17, pl. 1, figs. 11–13; pl. 3, fig. 42.
Fig. 76. Chaetoceros constrictus Gran. a, typical chain; width, 26µ. b, part of a chain; width, 27µ. c,
chain with resting spores; width, 20µ.
123
Chains straight, 12–36µ wide. Cells in broad girdle view oblong, with sharp corners. Deep constriction
between valves and girdle band. Valves flat or slightly concave, with moderately high valve mantle. Apertures
symmetrically lanceolate, slightly narrowing in center. Setae with no basal part, outer part turned at first at
right angles to chain axis. Terminal setae diverging at an acute angle, distinctly marked. Resting spores in
middle of mother cell, both valves with short spines.
Neritic. North temperate species. Abundant at some times off California. Common throughout eastern
Pacific.
77. Chaetoceros vanheurcki Gran
Figure 77
1897. Den Norske Nordh.-Exped. 1876–1878, Bot. Protoph., p. 18.
Cells 12–36µ broad. Distinguished from C. constrictus only by the parallel or pallisade spines on the
secondary valves of the resting spores. Terminal setae possibly slightly thicker and more spinous.
Fig. 77. Chaetoceros vanheurcki Gran. a, typical chain; width, 16µ. b, terminal cell of chain shown in
(a). c, section of terminal seta of same cell midway between cell and end of seta. d, chain with resting
spores; width, 18µ.
Neritic. Common. Probably confused with C. constrictus, so that abundance is difficult to estimate from
available records.
124
Fig. 78-A (1). Chaetoceros affinis Laud. a, typical chain, broad girdle view; width, 12µ. b and c, chains
with resting spores in process of formation; widths: b, 18µ; c, 18µ. d, e, and f, resting spores; widths: d,
14µ; e, 14µ; f, 20µ.
125
Fig. 78-A (2). Chaetoceros affinis Laud. a, characteristic chain; width, 13µ. b, chain with terminal-like
setae within the chain; width, 10µ. c, narrow chain (7µ wide) with less curved terminal setae. d, narrow
chain (8µ wide) with terminal setae nearly straight. e, section of terminal seta shown in (d).
126
covered with small spines, secondary valve flat with a bulge in center and bearing a few rather long, slender,
straight spines in the middle.
Neritic. South temperate species. Common. Often numerous from May through August.
Gran and others consider C. affinis as a central type of a group of forms all belonging to the same species.
Under this head are included C. ralfsii, C. schüttii, C. javanicus, C. distichus, C. angulatus, C. procerus, C.
najadianus, C. adriaticus, C. paradoxus var. schüttii, C. clevei, and C. schüttii var. genuina.
Variety circinalis (Meunier) Hustedt
Figure 78-B
1913. Meunier. Mém. Mus. R. Hist. Nat. Belgique, vol. 7, pt. 2, p. 37, pl. 6, figs. 1–6 (Chaetoceros schüttii
var. circinalis).
1930. Hustedt. Kieselalgen, pt. 1, p. 697, fig. 397.
Differs from the type in characteristic curvature of the setae, which in general lie perpendicular to the chain
axis, but are completely bent backward and surround the chain in a more or less semicircle. Rare.
Fig. 78-B. Chaetoceros affinis var. circinalis (Meun.) Hust. Typical chain; width, 12µ.
Fig. 78-C. Chaetoceros affinis var. willei (Gran) Hust. Typical chain; width, 11µ.
Fig. 79. Chaetoceros costatus Pav. a, typical chain, in broad girdle view; width, 27µ. b, connection
between cells (note intercalary bands); width, 12µ. c, another chain (note intercalary bands); width, 20µ.
d and e, chains with resting spores in process of formation; widths: d, 22µ; e, 18µ. f, chain with resting
spores; width, 23µ.
Neritic. Warm-water species. Common off southern California, found in great abundance in Gulf of
California. Nearly 900,000 cells per liter reported off Lower California in latitude 26°140 north in March,
1937 (Cupp and Allen, 1938), and nearly 2,000,000 cells per liter twenty-two miles south of Point Abreojos in
April, 1931 (Allen, 1934a).
128
Fig. 80. Chaetoceros laciniosus Schütt. a, typical chain, in broad girdle view; width, 12µ. b, chain,
14µ wide. c, chain, 14µ wide, with resting spores in process of formation. d, chain with resting spores;
width, 12µ.
129
Fig. 81. Chaetoceros pelagicus Cl. Chain in broad girdle view; width, 7µ.
Fig. 82. Chaetoceros brevis Schütt. Chain in broad girdle view; width, 13µ.
setae diverging in broad girdle view at angle of about 90° or more. Cells 8–17µ broad. Resting spores similar
to those of C. laciniosus, with dissimilarly arched valves, smooth or with fine spicules. Positive identification
difficult.
Neritic. Warm-water species, south temperate to subtropical. Not common off southern California.
Section IX. Diadema
83. Chaetoceros subsecundus (Grunow) Hustedt
Figure 83
1880–85. Grunow. In V. H. Syn., pl. 82 bis, figs. 6, 7 (Chaetoceros distans var. subsecundus). 1930.
Hustedt. Kieselalgen, pt. 1, p. 709, fig. 404.
SYNONYM: Chaetoceros diadema (Ehr.) Cleve.
Chains straight, may be slightly twisted about central axis, 12–44µ wide. Cells rectangular, with slightly
rounded corners in broad girdle view. Valves slightly convex. Apertures long, oval, slightly narrower in middle.
Setae arising near corners of cells, extending outward in valvar plane, fusing with those of adjacent cells at a
point beyond their bases. Terminal setae diverging at acute angle. Chromatophores one in each cell, attached to
broad side of girdle. Resting spores nearer one valve of mother cell. Primary valve with 4–12 dichotomously
branching spines and a narrow valve mantle. Secondary valve smooth.
Neritic. Boreal-arctic species. Fairly common off California but seldom abundant. Recorded by Gran (1912)
as a north temperate species.
Fig. 83. Chaetoceros subsecundus (Grun.) Hust. a, typical chain with resting spores; width, 44µ. b,
chain with resting spores in process of formation; width, 25µ. c, chain with completely formed resting
spores and two ordinary cells (note chromatophores); width, 40µ.
131
Fig. 84. Chaetoceros seiracanthus Gran. a, resting spores, narrow girdle view. b, part of a chain, broad
girdle view; width, 12µ.
Fig. 85. Chaetoceros holsaticus Schütt. Chain with resting spores in process of formation; width, 20µ.
Fig. 86. Chaetoceros difficilis Cl. Chain in broad girdle view; width, 15µ.
Fig. 87. Chaetoceros diversus Cl. a and b, two typical chains; widths: a, 12µ; b, 10µ. c, detail of section
of a chain. d, section of large seta.
cells. Setae arising from the corners of the cell, without basal part. Apertures very narrow, slitlike. Setae within
chains of two kinds: (1) thin setae more or less curved, often straight, and usually slightly turned toward the
chain ends; and (2) heavy setae almost club-shaped increasing in thickness from the base out, then becoming
thinner again near the ends. The first two-thirds of setae almost straight and at a sharp angle from the chain
axis, then turning gradually and at obtuse angle toward one or the other end of the chain and running almost
parallel to the chain axis in the outer part. The thicker setae are clearly angular and beset on the corners with
fine, spirally arranged little teeth. Terminal setae always thin and
133
differ from others in position—at first more or less U-shaped, in outer part nearly parallel to chain axis. Number
of pairs of heavy setae in a chain various and seem to conform to no rule. Chromatophores one in each cell, on
girdle side. Resting spores unknown.
Neritic. Tropical and subtropical species. Not common off California. More numerous off Lower California.
88. Chaetoceros laevis Leuduger-Fortmorel
Figure 88
1892. Diat. Malaisie, Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg, vol. 11, p. 38, pl. 6, fig. 2.
Chains straight, usually short, 3–4 cells. Cells in broad girdle view oblong, 5–12µ wide, adjacent cells
touching each other at corners or also by middle part. Apertures very narrow, appear to be lacking under low
magnifications. One chromatophore, attached to girdle. Valve mantle high, distinct notch at suture between
mantle and girdle. Setae various, terminals and some inner ones thin, hairlike; part of inner ones heavier.
Heavy setae fused for a short distance beyond base, then both heavy and terminal setae have same curvature,
at first nearly perpendicular to chain axis, then turn abruptly off at right angles, run parallel to chain axis, and
then converge slightly toward chain. Small inner setae leave cell at nearly right angles to chain axis and diverge
more or less toward ends, may follow same course as heavy setae (Schmidt, Atlas, pl. 339, fig. 4). Small spines
present on heavy setae.
Neritic. Tropical species. Rare. Found only south of Lower California.
Fig. 88. Chaetoceros laevis Leud.-Fort. Typical chain, broad girdle view; width, 5µ.
Hustedt (1930, p. 718) suggested the possibility that C. diversus and C. laevis belong to the same species,
and that one is a variety of the other since the construction of the setae is so similar. Resting spores have not
been found for either, so a decision can hardly be made yet.
89. Chaetoceros messanensis Castracane
Figure 89-A (p. 134); figure 89-B (p. 135)
1875. Atti del’Acad. Pont. Nuov. Linc., vol. 28, p. 32, pl. 1, fig. 1a.
Chains straight, not twisted. Elliptical valves. Apical axis 9–33µ in length. Cells rectangular with
conspicuous corners by which adjacent cells touch each other. Apertures fairly wide, linear-six-sided to almost
round. Valve mantle low, without distinct notch at junction with girdle band. Setae thin. Terminal setae
strongly diverging, unlike, usually one directed backward from the chain. Some inner setae fused for about
two-thirds their length, so that basal part is only a single seta which forks at its second third. These forked
horns are thicker than the others and with spirals of conspicuous small spines; sometimes with long hairlike
extensions. One chromatophore, placed near girdle.
Oceanic. Tropical and subtropical species. Not uncommon off southern California. Recorded by Gran
(1912) as a neritic, tropical species (C. furca).
134
Figure 89-A, d is a sketch of a specimen with forked setae resembling C. messanensis. The fused portion of
the setae is much more nearly perpendicular to the chain axis than normal. Chain short, in several individuals
examined only three cells, 7–7.5µ broad. Perhaps a stage of C. messanensis.
Fig. 89-A. Chaetoceros messanensis Castr. a, typical chain, broad girdle view (note spirals of small
spines on forked setae); width, 33µ. b, narrower chain (12µ wide). c, chain 9µ wide (note terminal setae
unlike typical ones shown in [a] and [b]). d, atypical chain (note long heavy straight fused region of
setae); width, 7µ.
135
Fig. 89-B. Chaetoceros messanensis Castr. Chain in broad girdle view (note long forked setae); width,
25µ.
Fig. 90. Chaetoceros similis Cl. a, typical chain (note chromatophores); width, 13µ. b, chain, broad
girdle view; width, 7µ.
136
somewhat outside the chain. Terminal setae usually slightly thicker than others, strongly diverging, parallel to
other setae of chain. Valve mantle high, with small but distinct groove at junction with girdle. Girdle-band
zone of resting cells small. Two chromatophores. Resting spores pear-shaped, central, armed on both valves
with small spicules.
Neritic. North temperate species. Rare off southern California. Found north to Alaska. Never in large
numbers.
91. Chaetoceros wighami Brightwell
Figure 91
1856. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci., vol. 4, p. 108, pl. 7, figs. 19–36.
Chains delicate, straight, not twisted, usually short. Cells with elliptical valves; apical axis 7–14µ long.
Cells in broad girdle view oblong, with sharp corners by which adjacent cells
Fig. 91. Chaetoceros wighami Brightw. Typical chain in broad girdle view; width, 7µ.
137
touch. Valves flat or more or less concave, sometimes with center slightly raised. Apertures linear-oblong to
broad lanceolate. Valve mantle moderately high, without distinct groove at girdle-band margin. Girdle-band
zone of resting cells slightly less than one-third the length of pervalvar axis. Setae thin, arising from the corners
of cell, without basal part. Inner setae at right angles to chain axis or more or less bowed, some about parallel to
chain axis. Terminal setae not thicker than the others, nearly parallel to chain axis, as a rule with an S-shaped
curve. One chromatophore. Resting spores central, valves unlike. Primary valve convex with fine spines,
secondary valve constricted at base, in the middle blunt coneshaped, smooth or with spines.
Neritic. Not common off California. May be easily confused with other species because of its great
variability. North temperate species.
92. Chaetoceros perpusillus Cleve
Figure 92
1897. Treat. phytopl. Atl. trib., p. 22, pl. 1, fig. 12.
Short chains, usually three-celled, 4–8µ broad. Apertures very small, slitlike. Valves flat. Setae very thin,
arising from the corners of the cells, diverging. Terminal setae more or less S-shaped, nearly parallel to the
chain axis, slightly thicker than others. May be a delicate form of C. wighami.
Fig. 92. Chaetoceros perpusillus Cl. a, typical chain, broad girdle view; width, 8µ. b, terminal cell and
setae shown in (a) more highly magnified.
Neritic. South temperate species. Very abundant off California, especially during February through April
and August to October. Also common off Lower California and in the Gulf of California.
Fig. 93. Chaetoceros curvisetus Cl. a, typical chain, broad girdle view; width, 7µ. b, chain in narrow
girdle view. c, chain with typical resting spores; width, 20µ. d, part of a chain with primary valves of
two resting spores (note delicate puncta on margin); width, 17µ.
Fig. 94. Chaetoceros pseudocurvisetus Mang. a, typical chain, broad girdle view; width, 19µ. b, detail
of region between two cells; width, 13µ. c, terminal cell and setae of chain shown in (b). d, detail of
section of terminal seta near the end.
Fig. 95. Chaetoceros debilis Cl. a, typical chain; width, 8µ. b, part of a chain with chromatophores;
width, 36µ. c, part of a chain with resting spores; width, 18µ. d, resting spores; width, 15µ.
140
arising within corners of cells, crossing outside their base and extending outward from the spiral. Chro-
matophores one per cell, situated at girdle side. Resting spores central, with two humps on primary valve
and two setae extending into the corners of mother cell. Secondary valve smooth.
Neritic. North temperate species. Very common and abundant especially in February, March, and April, and
in some years again during October, November, and December. Over 4,500,000 cells per liter reported off La
Jolla on April 22, 1922. Probably most abundant species off California. Also plentiful off Lower California.
Section XIII. Anastomosantia
96. Chaetoceros anastomosans Grunow
Figure 96
1880–85. In V. H. Syn., pl. 82, figs. 6–8.
Chains straight, or slightly curved. Elliptical or nearly circular valves. Apical axis 8–10µ long. Valves flat
or slightly concave. Cells in broad girdle view oblong. Valve mantle moderately high, with slight notch at
junction with girdle. Setae arising from corners of cell, thin and loose, hence variously bent but in general
at right angles to chain axis. With long base, not directly connected with corresponding seta of next cell but
bound to it by a cross piece the same thickness as setae and about 4–7µ long. Apertures wide. Terminal setae
very long, from base diverging in U-shape, then nearly parallel to long axis of chain. Chromatophores two per
cell, lying near the valve. Resting spores unknown.
Fig. 96. Chaetoceros anastomosans Grun. a, b, and c, parts of three chains, broad girdle view; widths:
a, 8µ; b, 10µ; c, 8µ.
The variety externa (Gran) Hustedt differs from the type by much shorter, 1–2µ long, cross pieces. Apertures
consequently smaller. Resting spores never central. Valves of spores convex but differently arched, both with
numerous scattered small spines. Cleve considers the type and variety as the same. Others have made two
separate species. They have been much confused. Only the type has been found in the eastern Pacific.
Neritic. South temperate species.
141
Fig. 97. Chaetoceros radicans Schütt. a, typical chain; width, 8µ. b, valve view. c and d, chains with
resting spores in process of formation. e, valve view of cell with heavier setae from chain shown in (d).
not touch adjacent cells. Moderately high valve mantle, without distinct notch on girdle-margin, girdle-band
zone high. Apertures rounded-rectangular, slightly compressed in center. Setae arising from just inside corners,
all bent out transversely, with many small spines. Terminal setae not especially different from others. One
chromatophore. Resting spores in pairs close together on two sister cells, without apertures, with peculiar,
smooth, thick setae which fuse for a space and farther out separate to surround the cell like a girdle.
142
Neritic. North temperate species. Common and often abundant especially from March through May and
again in August and September. In 1937 (Cupp and Allen, 1938) very abundant in Gulf of California, reaching
4,500,000 cells per liter on March 22.
98. Chaetoceros cinctus Gran
Figure 98
1897. Den Norske Nordh.-Exped. 1876–1878, Bot. Protoph., p. 24, pl. 2, figs. 23–27.
Chains straight or weakly curved, no special terminal cells, 10–15µ broad. Differs from C. randicans in its
smaller size and thinner setae which are not so strongly bent and have no spines. Otherwise like the former
species. Older resting spores show short spines on both valves. Neritic. South temperate species. Not common
off California.
Fig. 98. Chaetoceros cinctus Gran. a, chain with resting spores being formed, broad girdle view; width,
12µ. b, valve view of cell with heavier setae from chain shown in (a). c, resting spores; width, 15µ.
Fig. 99. Chaetoceros tortissimus Gran. Typical chain; width in broad girdle view, 17µ.
143
Fig. 100. Chaetoceros socialis Laud. a, typical colony. b, part of a chain, broad girdle view; width, 8µ.
c, part of a chain with resting spores; width, 7µ.
Neritic. North temperate species. Common and often abundant off southern California, especially in March
and April, and again from late June through August. One of most prominent species in Gulf of California in
March, 1937 (Cupp and Allen, 1938).
Section XVI. Simplicia
101. Chaetoceros gracilis Schütt
Figure 101 (p. 144)
1895. Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., vol. 13, p. 42, pl. 5, fig. 13.
Cells single, not in chains. In broad girdle view rectangular with rather conspicuous corners and concave
valves. Apical axis 9–12µ long. Valve mantle high, without distinct groove
144
Fig. 101. Chaetoceros gracilis Schütt. a, b, and c, typical cells in broad girdle view; widths: a, 12µ; b,
12µ; c, 9µ. d, valve view of cell shown in (c).
on girdle-band margin. Setae arising from a little within corners, curved near origin, later more nearly parallel,
in valve view appear as one line. Chromatophores two, attached to narrow side of girdle zone. Resting cells
central, ellipsoid, with nearly equally arched valves, finely spined.
Neritic. Present off southern California and Lower California, and in Gulf of California. Not common.
Recorded from Arctic seas, Greenland seas, the Baltic, and the Mediterranean.
102. Chaetoceros vistulae Apstein
Figure 102
1909. Wiss. Meeresunters., Abt. Kiel, N.F., vol. 11, p. 136, fig. 2.
Cells solitary or in pairs, with small elliptical valve, apical axis 7–8µ long. Valves strongly concave, drawn
out at corners of apical axis. Setae arising from these projecting corners, slightly concave, then almost parallel
to pervalvar axis and then slightly diverging, lying in the apical plane. One chromatophore per cell, lying on
girdle side. Resting spores unknown. Not well-known species.
Fig. 102. Chaetoceros vistulae Apstein. Typical cell, broad girdle view; width, 7µ.
Reported only occasionally off southern California. Neritic. Also a brackish-water species.
6. BIDDULPHIEAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf., p. 87.
a) EUCAMPIINAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf., p. 88.
145
Fig. 103. Eucampia zoodiacus Ehr. a, b, and c, parts of three chains, broad girdle view; widths: a,
46µ; b, 34µ; c, 14µ. d, two cells with arrangement of sculpturing indicated width, 43µ. e, valve mantle
showing arrangement of puncta. f, valve view of cell shown in (d) and (e). g, arrangement of sculpturing
on intercalary bands.
146
with puncta in more or less regular radial rows running outward from center toward processes, 16–20 puncta
in 10µ. Sculpturing on intercalary bands visible only under high magnification, 28–33 rows of puncta in 10µ.
Chromatophores small, numerous. Minute, highly refractive, colorless granules present in ends of processes.
Neritic. South temperate species. Very widely distributed. Often abundant off southern California, especially
from March through July, and in Gulf of California. Common as far north as Scotch Cap, Alaska.
104. Eucampia cornuta (Cleve) Grunow
Figure 104
1873. Cleve. Bih. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 1, no. 11, p. 7, pl. 1, fig. 6 (Moelleria cornuta).
1880–85. Grunow. In V. H. Syn., pl. 95 bis, fig. 5.
Similar to E. zoodiacus in character of chain and general appearance. Differentiated by much more
prominent intercalary bands, and longer, thinner processes, so that the apertures are wider. Sculpturing on
valves similar but not identical, in more definite rows from center to ends of processes, 18–20 puncta in 10µ.
Surface of intercalary bands similarly punctated, very fine puncta in rows, running in direction of pervalvar
axis. Length of apical axis 29–36µ.
Neritic. Warmer-water species than E. zoodiacus, subtropical to tropical. Found off southern California and
southward, but never in large numbers.
Fig. 104. Eucampia cornuta (Cl.) Grun. a, two cells of a chain, broad girdle view; width, 29µ. b, valve
mantle showing arrangement of sculpturing; width, 31µ.
Fig. 105. Climacodium frauenfeldianum Grun. a, typical chain; width of cells, 95µ. b, detail of
connection of processes of two cells.
Fig. 106. Streptotheca thamensis Shrub. a and b, two typical chains; width of both, 61µ.
b)TRICERATIINAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf., p. 89.
Genus XXV. DITYLUM Bailey
1862. Boston Jour. Nat. Hist., vol. 7, p. 332.
Cells elongated, prismatic to box-shaped. Solitary except immediately after division. Valves three- to four-
cornered, seldom bipolar, with a strong central siliceous hollow spine and a marginal ridge strengthened by ribs.
Intercalary bands more or less numerous. Valve surface more or less waved, with usually poorly developed
humps on the corners. In the central part a usually three-cornered elevated region the margin of which often
has a circle of short pervalvar-directed spines. Outer valve margin more or less strongly waved, giving the
appearance of lines running from valve to valve. Cell wall weakly siliceous, valve membrane delicately
areolated-punctated. Chromatophores numerous, small.
Species: 107. D. brightwellii (figs. 107-A, 107-B)
107. Ditylum brightwellii (West) Grunow
Figure 107-A; figure 107-B
1860. West. Trans. Micr. Soc., N.S., vol. 8, p. 149, pl. 7, fig. 6 (Triceratium brightwellii). 1880–85. Grunow.
In V. H. Syn., pl. 114, figs. 3–9.
Cells prism-shaped, with strongly rounded angles to nearly cylindrical, usually three to five times as long
as broad. Diameter 14–85µ. Valves triangular to circular with a central hollow spine. Valve rim strengthened
by small parallel ribs. Girdle zone very long, not easily distinguishable from the valves. Scalelike intercalary
bands visible with special treatment. Cell wall weakly siliceous, valves areolated-punctated, areolae about
10 in 10µ on center of valve, becoming more delicate toward the outside. A central area around the spine is
structureless. Areolae in radial rows on valve surface, in pervalvar rows on valve mantle. On base of mantle
16–19 areolae (or puncta) in 10µ. Structure of intercalary bands similar but more delicate. Chromatophores
small, numerous. Nucleus central. Resting spores large, excentric or polar. Valves like those of mother cell,
primary valve with a long valve mantle and strong spine, secondary valve without a mantle. Microspores
reported (Gran and Angst, 1931, p. 494, fig. 80).
Neritic. South temperate species. A common form off southern California, in Gulf of California, and north
to Scotch Cap, Alaska. Never in very large numbers.
149
Fig. 107-A. Ditylum brightwellii (West) Grun. a, typical cell with chromatophores; diameter, 63µ. b,
cell, 36µ in diameter, with chromatophores. c, cell 55µ in diameter. d, cell 83µ in diameter. e, abnormal
cell division; diameter, 61µ. f, cell 33µ in diameter. g, cell division; diameter, 57µ. h, view of cell turned
to show actual shape. i, valve mantle showing arrangement of sculpturing. b from. Alaska, others from
southern California.
150
Fig. 107-B. Ditylum brightwellii (West) Grun. a, cell division; diameter, 18µ. b, resting spore in parent
cell; diameter, 78µ. c, resting spore in parent cell; diameter, 24µ. d, cell division; diameter, 50µ. b is
from southern California; a, c, and d from Alaska.
Fig. 108. Lithodesmium undulatum Ehr. a, girdle view of chain; width, 35µ (see [f]). b and c, same
chain at different focuses; width, 55µ. d, another chain; width, 40µ. e, semi-valve view, to show true
shape of cell. f, highly magnified section of part of cell illustrated in (a) showing sculpturing. g, valve
view showing sculpturing. cm, connecting membrane; vm, valve mantle; ib, intercalary band; g, girdle.
Neritic. South temperate species. Not uncommon off southern California. Occasionally in fairly large
numbers (up to 120,000 cells per liter in August, 1927) off La Jolla. Moderately abundant in some catches in
Gulf of California in March, 1937.
c) BIDDULPHIINAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf., p. 92.
Genus XXVII. BIDDULPHIA Gray
1821. S. F. Gray. Nat. arr. Brit. plants, vol. 1, p. 294.
Cells box-shaped to cylindrical. Valves elliptical, with two poles or three- or foursided (rarely five-sided). At
the corners or at the ends of the apical axis more or less strongly developed processes or horns may be present
(see fig. D, 4, pr), or with distinct corners, usually with transapical grooves so that valve surface is more or
less strongly humped. Very fine slime pores usually present on end surfaces of processes or on corners
152
of the valves, forming slime cushions which hold the cells together in straight or zigzag chains. In plankton
forms, spines (fig. D, 4, s) are usually present which hold the cells in chains or the cells may live singly.
Girdle zone sharply differentiated from valve zone, cylindrical or prism-shaped, with numerous cross striations.
Intercalary bands indistinct if present. Chromatophores numerous, small, lying against the cell wall. Nucleus
central. Cell wall, except in delicate plankton forms, strongly siliceous, usually with distinct areolae or
granules. Auxospores formed. Flagellated microspores known in a few species.
Usually coastal forms, often fixed. Certain species truly planktonic, but always neritic.
Species: 109. B. pulchella (fig. 109)
110. B. mobiliensis (fig. 110)
111. B. longicruris (figs. 111-A(1), 111-A(2), 111-A(3))
B. longicruris var. hyalina (figs. 111-B(1), 111-B(2), 111-B(3))
112. B. aurita (figs. 112-A(1), 112-A(2), 112-A(3))
B. aurita var. obtusa (fig. 112-B)
113. B. rhombus (fig. 113)
114. B. dubia (fig. 114)
115. B. alternans (fig. 115)
109. Biddulphia pulchella Gray
Figure 109
1821. Nat. arr. Brit. plants, vol. 1, p. 294.
SYNONYM: Biddulphia biddulphiana (Smith) Boyer.
Valves elliptical, convex, divided transversely by two to six ribs, sides undulating. Length along apical axis
50–70µ. A globular process at each end of apical axis, constricted
Fig. 109. Biddulphia pulchella Gray. a, parts of two cells; width (length along apical axis), 60µ. b,
section of cell more highly magnified.
at the base. Two or three short spines usually present near center of valve. Very fine pores on rounded corner
processes; about 20 areolae or puncta in 10µ. Valve surface with 3½–5 areolae in 10µ, smaller near the valve
center. Valve mantle high, deep furrow at junction with girdle zone; 4–5 areolae in 10µ near edge. Girdle band
similarly areolated, 5–6 in 10µ (usually slightly more delicate), in nearly parallel lines.
Found occasionally in plankton samples but a bottom form. Temperate species.
153
Fig. 110. Biddulphia mobiliensis Bail. a, typical cell, broad girdle view; width, 157µ. b, typical cell
with normal distribution of chromatophores; width, 89µ. c, cell division; width, 100µ. d, chain; width,
45µ. e, sculpturing on valve process. f, sculpturing on valve mantle. g, sculpturing on girdle band. h,
end of spine.
diagonally outward. Two long spines placed far apart but about equally far from the processes, directed
obliquely outward, straight or often bent abruptly in their outer part. Cells relatively thin-walled, without a
sharp constriction between valve and girdle zone. Sculpturing fine, reticulate, 14–16 areolae in 10µ on valve
and valve mantle, 17–18 on girdle band. Auxospores formed as large bladders from the separation of the
valves, with much larger cells inside. Microspores observed.
Neritic, truly planktonic. Temperate and south temperate species. Common off southern California but never
observed in large numbers.
154
Fig. 111-A (1). Biddulphia longicruris Grev. a, cell in broad girdle view showing sculpturing on valve
and band; width, 42µ. b, typical cell with chromatophores; width, 40µ. c, threecelled chain; width, 62µ.
d, cell in narrow girdle view showing sculpturing on valve process and intercalary bands. e, valve view;
length along apical axis (width in broad girdle view), 36µ; length of transapical axis, 20µ.
155
specimens, 47µ. Surface with a rounded conical elevation in the center from which usually two (sometimes
one or three) long spines project obliquely upward and extend past and on either side of the adjacent valve of
the neighboring cell. Spines often bent to run
Fig. 111-A (2). Biddulphia longicruris Grev. a, abnormal cell division; width, 32µ. b, individuals with
one spine on each valve; width, 15µ. c, normal, recently divided cell; width, 48µ. d, cell division (note
filmlike siliceous membrane between cells); width, 98µ. e, chain in broad girdle view; width, 79µ. f,
same chain as in (e), narrow girdle view. g, abnormal cell division; width, 33µ. h, cell with one spine on
each valve, broad girdle view; width, 24µ. i, same cell as in (h), narrow girdle view.
156
nearly parallel to pervalvar axis near ends, with cuplike expansion on tips. Processes situated at ends of apical
axis, usually long and slender, with rounded ends, slightly inflated at base. Cells joined into chains by ends of
processes. Usually a deep indentation or concavity on valve mantle above junction with girdle zone. Girdle
zone with straight sides. Valves with puncta radiating from a small hyaline central area, forming concentric
Fig. 111-A (3). Biddulphia longicruris Grev. a, large cells; 85µ wide. b, recently divided cell; width,
41µ. c, chain of one long cell with intercalary bands, and a dividing cell (note new valves of daughter
cells have one spine only); width, 24µ. d, cell with intercalary bands (resembles B. longicruris var.
japonica Grun., figured in Van Heurck, Syn., pl. 100, fig. 7); width, 42µ.
ellipses on each half of the valve, in nearly parallel rows near base of valve mantle. Puncta on valve 12–17 in
10µ. Girdle zone with fine, parallel, vertical rows of puncta, 18–21 puncta in 10µ. Intercalary bands sometimes
present, finely punctate, puncta 15–18 in 10µ, in vertical rows. Occasionally with a filmlike siliceous membrane
between adjacent cells. Chromatophores small, numerous, near the wall. Nucleus central.
Neritic. Temperate to subtropical species. Reported north to Straits of Juan de Fuca. Most abundant in
warmer waters. Common at Point Hueneme and south to 17°410 north latitude.
157
Fig. 111-B (1). Biddulphia longicruris var. hyalina (Schröd.) Cupp. a, typical chain (note filmlike
siliceous membrane between cells); width, 85µ. b, cell division; width, 48µ. c, typical chain (note three
spines on valve of lowest cell); width, 125µ. d, sculpturing on valve mantle; width, 88µ.
158
SYNONYMS: Biddulphia extensa Mann, 1907, Contrib. U.S. Nat. Herb., vol. 10, pt. 5, p. 302. pl. 47, figs. 1,
2.
Biddulphia longicruris Greville, in Gran and Angst, 1931, Publ. Puget Sound Biol. Sta., Univ. Wash., p.
491, fig. 75, a–c.
Valve an elongated ellipse. Length of apical axis 24–184µ; average of 80 specimens, 87µ. General shape
of valve as in type. Spines similar to those of type but usually relatively shorter. Often entire spine oblique
without ends running parallel to pervalvar
Fig. 111-B (2). Biddulphia longicruris var. hyalina (Schröd.) Cupp. a, typical chain, filmlike siliceous
membrane not present; width, 63µ. b, wide chain (note siliceous membrane between cells); width, 170µ.
c, long narrow cell; width, 24µ. d, sculpturing on valve mantle and bands. e, valve view; length along
apical axis, 100µ; length along transapical axis, 20µ. f, typical cell with chromatophores; width, 103µ.
159
axis. Processes usually much shorter than those in type, more robust, with blunt ends. Girdle zone separated
from valve mantle by a shallow groove; only slight concavity above girdle zone. Arrangement of punctation
as in type; slightly coarser on valve, 8–12 puncta in 10µ. On girdle 18–22 puncta in 10µ. Intercalary bands
usually absent; when present, with 16–20 puncta in 10µ. Filmlike siliceous membrane between adjacent cells
found much more commonly than in type. Chromatophores numerous, small. Cells usually in straight, more
or less long chains.
Fig. 111-B (3). Biddulphia longicruris var. hyalina (Schröd.) Cupp. a, two typical cells; width, 42µ. b,
two wide, flat cells; width, 176µ. c, cell with numerous intercalary bands; width, 73µ. d and e, transition
forms between species and variety; widths: d, 58µ; e, 73µ. Note differences in length and shape of
processes on two ends of same cell, particularly in (e).
160
Found with the type in temperate regions but extends into more northern waters. Common off La Jolla, Point
Hueneme, San Francisco, and north to Alaska.
Mann, in 1907, described the species B. extensa from specimens found in Monterey Bay, California. A
year earlier Schröder had described his new species, B. hyalina, from San Francisco Bay, a species which is
undoubtedly identical with Mann’s B. extensa. Gran and Angst (1931) gave B. extensa as
Fig. 112-A (1). Biddulphia aurita (Lyng.) Bréb. and God. a, typical cells, broad girdle view; width, 61µ.
b, cell with all sculpturing indicated; width, 36µ. c, width, 48µ. d, cell with chromatophores; width, 30µ.
e, width, 16µ. f, chain; width, 30µ. g, width, 40µ. h, width, 24µ. All specimens from Alaskan waters.
161
a synonym of B. longicruris described in 1859 by Greville from specimens found in California guano. On
casual examination this synonymy seems unjustified. However, after a study of hundreds of specimens from
the Canal Zone to Alaska, it was found impossible to place many individuals definitely in one or the other
species. In fact, on several occasions specimens were found in which one end bore a close resemblance to what
has been called B. longicruris, the other end to B. hyalina (fig. 111-B(3), d, e). We feel, consequently, that a
separation of the group into two species is unjustified. On the other hand, the differences in habitat, average
length of apical axis, and shape of processes are too definite to warrant placing all the specimens under B.
longicruris. The logical disposition of the matter seems to be to make B. hyalina a variety under the type B.
longicruris.
Fig. 112-A (2). Biddulphia aurita (Lyng.) Bréb. and God. Broad forms (from Alaskan waters); widths:
a, 54µ; b, 79µ; c, 97µ.
162
Cells united in straight or zigzag chains. Valves elliptical-lanceolate, with obtuse processes inflated at the
base. Center part of valve convex, more or less flattened at the top from which usually more or less long spines
project. Spines sometimes absent or several. Girdle zone sharply differentiated from the valve zone by a clear
depression. Cell wall strongly siliceous, areolated-punctated. Areolae 8–10 in 10µ, on the valve in radial rows.
On the girdle band in pervalvar rows, 7–10 rows in 10µ, with 8–14 puncta
Fig. 112-A (3). Biddulphia aurita (Lyng.) Bréb. and God. a, individual found in lat. 17°410 N., long.
102°30 W.; width, 29µ (note spines on valves). b, individual from southern California; width, 16µ.
or areolae in 10µ. A very variable species. Length of apical axis 12–97µ. With a number of small spines on
valves in warmer-water specimen [fig. 112-A(3), a] from 17°410 north latitude, 102°30 west longitude.
Neritic and littoral species. Widely distributed, but most abundant in northern (arctic and boreal) seas.
Very common at Scotch Cap, Alaska (Cupp, 1937), especially during April and May. Common off southern
California but never in large numbers.
Variety obtusa (Kützing) Hustedt
Figure 112-B
1844. Kützing. Bacill., p. 137, pl. 18, fig. VIII, 1–3, 6–8 (Odontella obtusa).
1930. Hustedt. Kieselalgen, pt. 1, p. 848, fig. 502.
Differs from the type chiefly in the shortness of the processes and the absence of central spines. The
difference in the processes is not always very apparent. Length along apical axis 24–70µ. Puncta 8–10 in
10µ on valve in radiating rows; 7–8 on girdle in 6 pervalvar rows in 10µ.
Littoral. Arctic to north temperate species. Fairly common off Scotch Cap, Alaska. Not recorded off
southern California.
163
Fig. 112-B. Biddulphia aurita var. obtusa (Kütz.) Hust. a, two cells from a chain, sculpturing indicated;
width, 61µ. b, typical cell, with chromatophores; width, 36µ. c, cell division; width, 36µ.
Fig. 113. Biddulphia rhombus (Ehr.) W. Sm. a, broad girdle view; width (length of apical axis), 37µ. b,
valve view; length of transapical axis, 24µ.
164
Fig. 114. Biddulphia dubia (Brightw.) Cl. a, girdle view. b, valve view of same cell; length along apical
axis, 65µ; length along transapical axis, 44µ; length along sides, 40µ. c, valve view of same cell, lower
focus. d, detail of valve view in (c). Upper end in (d) and (b) is left end in (c). e, girdle view of another
cell, 42µ across.
165
girdle zone divided by a deep groove. Girdle outstanding. Surface of valve coarsely reticulated, 2–2½ meshes
in 10µ on center of valve, 2½–4 on mantle. Reticulations wavy, irregular, and of unequal size. Valves distinctly
punctate, 8–9 puncta in 10µ. Puncta on girdle in regular pervalvar rows, 7–8 puncta in 10µ. Length of apical
axis 42–65µ; of transapical axis 30–44µ.
Neritic. Warm-water species, subtropical to tropical. Reported only occasionally off southern California.
Much confusion has arisen concerning the relationship of this species. It is unquestionably the same species
as Triceratium bicorne Cleve (1878, p. 17, pl. 5, fig. 30). Figures 21–23 on plate 78 of Schmidt’s Atlas are
titled Biddulphia reticulata Roper var.? Mann (1907, p. 301) stated that they are certainly closer to B. dubia,
and in fact figure 21 shows a specimen from San Francisco which closely resembles the ones sketched here.
Figure 23, from a Yokohama specimen, is very similar to our figure 114, c. Biddulphia reticulata is a larger
diatom than B. dubia, the reticulations are quite regular, usually hexagonal, with thin dividing walls showing
“knots” at their points of juncture. The border is less massive and the valve outline is either elliptical or with
convex sides approaching an elliptical outline. The puncta are smaller and more distinct than in B. dubia.
Fig. 115. Biddulphia alternans (Bail.) V. H. a, chain, girdle view. b, valve view; length along sides, 32µ.
c, semivalve view. d, girdle view of edge of cell.
166
Fig. 116. Isthmia nervosa Kütz. a, girdle view of a cell; width, 240µ. b, areolae from valve mantle
(marked C on [a]). c, areolae from girdle band (regions indicated with corresponding letters A and B on
[a]). d, colony.
167
areolae—chambers—with poroid outer membrane. Diameter of areolae 5–7.5µ, on the girdle band as a rule
somewhat smaller (5–6µ), on the valve mantle 6.5–7µ. On the mantle surface areolae arranged in more or less
regular quincunx, on the valve surface irregular. Valves with several transapical, on the valve surface more or
less anastomosing, ribs that extend to the edge of the valve mantle. Usually 10–12 ribs on each side of the
valve.
Littoral. Occurring in plankton as tychopelagic species. Widespread, but never abundant. Usually found in
colder waters. Reported from San Francisco to Alaska.
e) HEMIAULINAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf., p. 95.
Genus XXIX. CERATAULINA H. Péragallo
1892. Le Diatomiste, vol. 1, p. 103.
Cells cylindrical, usually in chains. Valves slightly arched, with two blunt projections or processes near their
margin, attached to adjacent cell by means of a fine, small, curved, hairlike process which fits into the valve of
the adjacent cell. Intercalary bands numerous, annular. Chromatophores numerous, small. Nucleus against the
cell wall. Cell wall soft and weakly siliceous, collapsing when dried. Sculpturing very delicate.
Species: 117. C. bergonii (fig. 117)
117. Cerataulina bergonii H. Péragallo
Figure 117
1892. Le Diatomiste, vol. 1, p. 103, pl. 13, figs. 15, 16.
Cells twisted about the central axis of the chain; apertures between cells often very small. Processes short.
Diameter of cells 11–36µ. Intercalary bands numerous, collarlike, very indistinct. Cell wall weakly siliceous
and very delicately sculptured. Valves with radial rows of puncta, 21–23 puncta in 10µ. Chromatophores small,
numerous.
Neritic. South temperate species. Common off California, in Gulf of California, and north to Alaska.
Fig. 117. Cerataulina bergonii H. Pér. a, cells 36µ wide. b, typical cells with chromatophores; width,
13µ. c, cells 20µ wide. d, valve mantles of cells illustrated in (c) showing arrangement of sculpturing.
168
Fig. 118. Hemiaulus hauckii Grun. a, part of a chain, broad girdle view; width, 15µ. b, detail of
processes, claws, and sculpturing of valve mantle; width, 18µ.
Oceanic or neritic. Temperate and tropical species. Not uncommon off southern California and in Gulf
of California but never in large numbers. Recorded by Lebour (1930) as an oceanic, temperate and tropical
species; by Gran (1912) as neritic, tropical.
119. Hemiaulus sinensis Greville
Figure 119
1865. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., vol. 16, no. 591, pl. 5, fig. 9.
Cells broadly elliptical in valve view. Chains straight or curved, more or less long. Pervalvar axis more or
less elongated. Apical axis 15–36µ long. Valves with slightly convex surface of elliptical outline. Valve mantle
high, no groove at base. Processes on valves thin but strong, with a strong claw on the ends. Cell wall more
strongly siliceous than in H. hauckii, areolated-punctated. Areolae in radial, on the mantle surface pervalvar,
rows of characteristic excentric arrangement in that the center of the areolation
169
does not coincide with the center of the valve, but lies on one of the mantle surfaces. Areolae in the center of the
valve 7–9 in 10µ, on the base of the mantle 11–13 in 10µ. Intercalary bands visible with special preparation.
Very fine punctation present on bands in rows, 28–29 rows in 10µ.
Fig. 119. Hemiaulus sinensis Grev. a and b, chains in narrow girdle view. c, chain in broad girdle view;
width, 36µ. d, part of a chain, narrow girdle view. e, cell in broad girdle view showing sculpturing (note
excentric arrangement of areolae); width, 30µ. f, detail of processes and claws of cell shown in (d). g,
detail of cell shown in (d).
170
Neritic. South temperate or subtropical species. Fairly common off southern California and southward but
never abundant.
120. Hemiaulus membranaceus Cleve
Figure 120
1873. Bih. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 1, no. 11, p. 6, pl. 1, fig. 5.
Cells in girdle view from almost square to five or six times wider (length along apical axis) than long (length
along pervalvar axis). Valves concave or nearly flat between processes. Processes short, with a more or less
sharp point. United in chains by processes. Apertures narrow, linear to elliptical, or even broadly elliptical.
Cell wall weakly siliceous. Punctation on valves very fine, difficult to see. Length of apical axis 30–97µ.
Rare. Tropical species. Reported in eastern Pacific only from near equator (lat. 3°150 S.). Probably oceanic.
7. EUODIEAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf., p. 99.
Genus XXXI. HEMIDISCUS Wallich
1860. Trans. Micr. Soc., N.S., vol. 8, p. 42.
Cells shaped like a sector of a sphere, in girdle view wedge-shaped, narrowing from the dorsal toward the
ventral side. Valve semicircular to asymmetrically elliptical. Valves flat with short valve mantles. Intercalary
bands and septa absent, pervalvar axis not particularly elongated. Cell wall weakly or strongly siliceous, with
regular and thick areolation, radial rows frequently in bundles. Marginal spinulae often present, also sometimes
a pseudonodule near middle of ventral valve margin. With or without a central hyaline area. Chromatophores
numerous, small.
Species: 121. H. cuneiformis var. ventricosa (fig. 121)
121. Hemidiscus cuneiformis Wallich
1860. Trans. Micr. Soc., N.S., vol. 8, p. 42, pl. 2, figs. 3, 4.
Variety ventricosa (Castracane) Hustedt
Figure 121
1886. Castracane. Diat. Chall.-Exped., p. 149, pl. 12, fig. 5 (Euodia ventricosa).
1930. Hustedt. Kieselalgen, pt. 1, p. 906, fig. 542d.
Ventral margin regularly and gently convex, not drawn in (concave) near the ends. Dorsal margin strongly
convex, in some individuals remarkably high-arched, without constrictions near the valve poles. Apical axis
(along straight edge) 97µ long; transapical axis 83µ long. Sculpturing coarser or finer, near the center of the
valve 9–12 areolae in 10µ irregularly scattered; midway to margin 14–15 in 10µ, in radial rows in more or less
distinct bundles; near margin finer, 18–19 in 10µ. Construction of bundles not so regular as in corresponding
cases in Coscinodiscus species. In Hemidiscus cuneiformis the rows are shorter and inserted here and there. In
a circle about the valve there is a row of regularly spaced spinulae or pores that project toward the inner part of
the cell papillary-like.
171
The ventral papillae lie on the valve surface near the margin, the dorsal ones are deeper on the valve mantle
and are therefore not visible in valve view in the type. In figure 121, a they can be seen but are closer to the
edge. Two papillae, one on each apical
Fig. 121. Hemidiscus cuneiformis var. ventricosa (Castr.) Hust. a, valve view; width across widest
region, 97µ. b, sketch of girdle view from wider side. c, sketch of girdle view from narrower side.
pole, are as a rule somewhat larger than the others. Near the middle of the ventral margin there is one larger
eyelike spot.
Oceanic. Subtropical species. Rare. Reported only occasionally off southern California.
B. PENNATAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pfianzenf., p. 101.
B-1. ARAPHIDEAE
IV. FRAGILARIOIDEAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pfianzenf., p. 101.
8. TABELLARIEAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pfianzenf., p. 101.
a) TABELLARIINAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pfianzenf., p. 101.
Genus XXXII. STRIATELLA Agardh
1832. Consp. crit. Diat., p. 60.
Cells in girdle view nearly rectangular, tabular. United into closed bands or zigzag chains. Intercalary
bands numerous, open on one end, on the other with shorter or longer shallow septa thickened slightly near
the margin, the thickenings alternating in adjacent intercalary bands. Valves linear-lanceolate, with a narrow
pseudoraphe and delicate transapical rows of punctated striae. Intercalary bands likewise striated in pervalvar
direction. Cell wall weakly siliceous. Chromatophores numerous small granules, radiate.
Fig. 122. Striatella unipunctata (Lyng.) Ag. a, cell with chromatophores, broad girdle view; width
(length of apical axis), 62µ. b, cell in broad girdle view; width, 50µ. c, cell in valve view, sculpturing
indicated; length of apical axis, 55µ; length of transapical axis, 8µ. d, section of cell illustrated in (b)
showing striations on intercalary bands.
All marine species, predominantly littoral, but often found in the plankton.
Species: 122. S. unipunctata (fig. 122)
123. S. delicatula (fig. 123)
172
173
122. Striatella unipunctata (Lyngbye) Agardh
Figure 122
1819. Lyngbye. Tent. hydrophyt. dan., pl. 62 (Fragilaria unipunctata).
1832. Agardh. Consp. crit. Diat., p. 61.
Cells tabular in girdle view with slightly rounded corners. Intercalary bands numerous, 6–10 in 10µ, with
short septa, 3–5 in 10µ. Valves linear to elliptical-lanceolate with moderately blunt-rounded ends. Length of
apical axis 50–78µ; of transapical axis 6–10µ. Valve surface delicately areolated-punctated. Puncta in a three
self-crossing line system, 18–25 oblique lines in 10µ. Valve ends with small hyaline region. Pseudoraphe very
narrow but sharply marked. Mantle surface of the intercalary bands with delicate pervalvar striae, 29–30 in
10µ. Chromatophores granular to oblong, arranged radially about the nucleus, often connected in the middle
and then with a central pyrenoid or separate with a pyrenoid in the middle of each plate.
Very common in the littoral zone. Occurs in the plankton accidentally. Temperate species.
123. Striatella delicatula (Kützing) Grunow
Figure 123
1844. Kützing. Bacill., p. 125, pl. 18, fig. III, 1 (Hyalosira delicatula).
1880–85. Grunow. In V. H. Syn., pl. 54, figs. 5, 6.
Cells in girdle view tabular or nearly rectangular, pervalvar axis often considerably longer than the apical
axis. Intercalary bands more or less numerous, 12–14 in 10µ; short septa 6–7 in 10µ. Valve linear to linear-
lanceolate with somewhat blunt-rounded ends. Apical axis 7–12µ long; transapical axis 1.5–3.5µ. Transapical
striae delicate, variable in number, 25–32 in 10µ.
Fig. 123. Striatella delicatula (Kütz.) Grun. a and b, two cells in broad girdle view; widths: a, 11µ; b,
8µ.
Common littoral species. Found frequently in the plankton. Widespread but often overlooked because of its
delicate appearance.
Genus XXXIII. GRAMMATOPHORA Ehrenberg
1841. Phys. Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berl. 1839, pp. 122, 152.
Cells in girdle view rectangular with rounded corners, usually united into zigzag chains. Resting cells with
two intercalary bands, one in each cell half. Intercalary bands with two polar, flat or more or less undulating
septa (see fig. F, 1, se) that run far toward the cell center and leave only a central window in the intercalary
bands (fig. F, 1, ib). Valve mantle (fig. F, 1, vm) with short pseudosepta near ends. Valve surface as a rule linear
with parallel or more or less transapically constricted sides. Membranc with transapical rows of puncta, puncta
in more or less regular longitudinal rows or in a self-crossing oblique line system. Valve ends usually with
irregularly sculptured polar fields. Pseudoraphe narrow. Mucilage pores present on the poles. Chromatophores
one to several, large, more or less lobed plates.
All species are littoral marine.
Species: 124. G. angulosa (fig. 124)
125. G. marina (fig. 125-A)
G. marina var. adriatica (fig. 125-B)
126. G. oceanica (fig. 126)
174
124. Grammatophora angulosa Ehrenberg
Figure 124
1841. Phys. Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berl. 1839, p. 154.
Cells with irregularly wavy, bent septa, on the inner end hook-shaped, bent toward the center. Line of
separation between valve mantle and intercalary band only on the poles with a group of short punctated striae.
Valves linear-elliptical with slightly convex
Fig. 124. Grammatophora angulosa Ehr. a, girdle view; length, 30µ. b, girdle view of chain (note cell
division); length, 20µ. c, valve view showing underlying intercalary bands; length, 28µ; width, 5µ. d,
valve view of same cell as in (c) showing sculpturing.
sides and blunt-rounded ends. Length of apical axis 14–35µ; of transapical axis 4–6µ. Transapical striae
18–20 in 10µ, distinctly punctated, puncta in regular longitudinal rows parallel to the middle line. Pseudoraphe
narrow. Valve ends with small hyaline polar field.
Littoral. Found occasionally in plankton collections. Temperate species.
125. Grammatophora marina (Lyngbye) Kützing
Figure 125-A
1819. Lyngbye. Tent. hydrophyt. dan., pl. 62 A (Diatoma marinum).
1844. Kützing. Bacill., p. 128, pl. 17, fig. 24; pl. 18, fig. I, 1–5.
Cells with septa having only a single and slight undulation close to the base or nearly flat. With short rows
of striae only at the poles on the dividing line between valve mantles and intercalary bands. Pseudosepta
of the valve mantles short. Valves relatively broad, linear, in the middle usually more or less transapically
widened, on the ends broadly rounded. Length of apical axis 30–82µ; of transapical axis 5–10µ. Transapical
striae delicate but distinct, 20–22 in 10µ, distinctly punctated-areolated, puncta in quincunx. Pseudoraphe very
narrow. Hyaline polar field usually small.
Littoral, but often present in plankton collections taken near shore. Widespread.
Fig. 125-A. Grammatophora marina (Lyng.) Kütz. a, cell in broad girdle view; length, 43µ. b, cell
division; length, 35µ. c, cell 33µ long, broad girdle view. d, valve view of cell illustrated in (c) showing
underlying intercalary bands; width, 4.5µ. e, valve view showing sculpturing. f, chain, cells 38µ long.
Fig. 125-B. Grammatophora marina var. adriatica Grun. a, recently divided cells in broad girdle view;
length, 38µ. b, valve view; width, 6µ.
176
Fig. 126. Grammatophora oceanica (Ehr.) Grun. a, broad girdle view; length, 65µ. b, valve view
showing underlying intercalary bands. c, valve view showing sculpturing on surface; width, 5µ.
apical axis 40–75µ; of transapical axis 4–6µ. Transapical striae delicate, 21–23 in 10µ, finely punctated, puncta
in quincunx. Pseudoraphe very narrow. Polar field small. (See fig. F, 1.)
Littoral. Present occasionally in plankton collections taken near shore. Widespread.
b) LICMOPHORINAE Hustedt
1931. Kieselalgen, pt. 2, sec. 1, p. 52.
Genus XXXIV. LICMOPHORA Agardh
1827. Bot. Zeit. 1827, p, 628.
Cells with wedge-shaped girdle-band side and wedge- or club-shaped valve. Two intercalary bands in resting
cells, with a more or less long penetrating septum on the head pole. Valves with transapical punctated striae,
seldom with weak transapical ribs and extremely delicately punctated intercalary space. Pseudoraphe usually
distinct, often
177
developed as a strong siliceous rib. Chromatophores numerous small granules or a few larger plates. Auxospore
formation, so far as known, consists of one asexual auxospore in one mother cell.
Littoral marine species, held to the substrate by a shorter or longer, often branched gelatinous stalk.
Species: 127. L. abbreviata (fig. 127)
127. Licmophora abbreviata Agardh
Figure 127
1831. Consp. crit. Diat., p. 42.
Cells in girdle view usually strongly wedge-shaped with moderately rounded upper corners, deeply penetrat-
ing septa, and more or less strongly waved intercalary bands. Valves narrow club-shaped, with wide, usually
somewhat wedge-shaped rounded head and more
Fig. 127. Licmophora abbreviata Ag. a, cell in girdle view; length, 72µ. b, upper pole of cell shown in
(a). c, lower pole of cell shown in (a).
acute rounded foot pole. In the lower part slightly concave. Apical axis 40–80µ long; transapical axis 4–8µ.
Transapical striae fairly strong, on the base 10–12 in 10µ, in the upper part of the valve becoming weaker, near
the upper (head) pole 13–16 in 10µ. Pseudoraphe narrow but distinct.
Littoral, but often found in plankton collections. Widespread.
Genus XXXV. CLIMACOSPHENIA Ehrenberg
1843. Phys. Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berl. 1841, p. 401.
Cells of similar construction to those of the genus Licmophora. In girdle and valve view wedge-shaped,
with two intercalary bands that have, instead of the end septa, numerous transapical septa the halves of which
grow from the cell wall toward the inside and in the middle line come together in a more or less toothed seam.
Internal septa are pierced by a row of large oval openings which in valve view give a stepladder appearance to
the club-shaped valve (see fig. F, 2, se). Valve surface with usually delicate
178
transapical punctated striae that run directly together so that no distinct pseudoraphe is formed. On both sides
of the middle line a hyaline longitudinal line (furrow or siliceous rib) is present. Mantle surface of the valve
and the girdle bands pervalvarly punctated-striated. The structure of the girdle band is considerably coarser
than that of the valve. Chromatophores numerous small granules.
Species: 128. C. moniligera (fig. 128)
128. Climacosphenia moniligera Ehrenberg
Figure 128
1843. Phys. Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berl. 1841, p. 411, pl. 2, fig. VI, 1.
Cells in girdle view wedge-shaped with straight sides. Intercalary bands with usually numerous septa,
usually smaller in the upper part of the cell, in the lower part gradually
Fig. 128. Climacosphenia moniligera Ehr. a, girdle view; length, 373 µ. b, sections of cell in girdle view.
c, valve view with underlying intercalary bands. d, sections of cell in valve view showing sculpturing on
surface.
widening, often very irregular. Openings (“windows”) in upper part roundish-four-cornered, toward the lower
part gradually becoming elliptical, often irregular. Valves club-shaped, on the poles blunt, rounded, toward the
lower (foot) pole gradually becoming smaller, the upper and lower parts not distinctly differentiated. Length of
179
apical axis 300–400µ. At the widest part of the valve 25–35µ across; at the narrowest part, above the lower
pole, 9–10µ wide. Transapical striae 17–21 in 10µ in the marginal part above the lower pole; 12–17 in the
middle part; toward the upper (head) pole gradually becoming closer, 21–24 in 10µ. Striae very delicately
punctated. In the middle part above the lower pole puncta are larger, almost irregularly placed, no longer in
rows. Pseudoraphe absent. Hyaline longitudinal lines distinct.
Littoral. Abundant in warmer waters in enclosed regions, as in Mission Bay near San Diego.
9. FRAGILARIEAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pfianzenf., p. 110.
a) DIATOMINAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pfianzenf., p. 110.
Genus XXXVI. PLAGIOGRAMMA Greville
1859. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci., vol. 7, p. 207.
Cells in girdle view rectangular-tabular, without intercalary bands and septa. Valves usually linear-
lanceolate, sometimes with wavy margins, with transapical ribs that penetrate more or less deeply into the
inner part of the cell as pseudosepta, often only very shallow. Usually two pairs of ribs present, of which
one lies near the center, the other near the end of the valve; seldom several pairs of ribs present; very seldom
only one rib in the center. Cell wall with more or less delicate transapical and longitudinal ribs by means of
which the membrane is areolated-chambered. Sometimes the transapical ribs are wider than the more delicate
longitudinal ribs so that the areolae become isolated transapical rows of puncta. Puncta and areolae usually in
regular longitudinal rows. Polar field apparently hyaline, although in many individuals, perhaps in all, with a
very delicate sculpturing. Chromatophores, so far as known, numerous small granules.
Fig. 129. Plagiogramma vanheurckii Grun. a and b, parts of two chains, girdle view; widths: a, 22µ; b,
28µ.
Marine forms that live in close chains. Most species live on the coast in warmer waters.
Species: 129. P. vanheurckii (fig. 129)
180
Fig. 130. Campylosira cymbelliformis (A. Schm.) Grun. Part of a chain, girdle view; width, 40µ.
rodlike or with widened center part. Valve in outline linear, lanceolate to elliptical, often enlarged or constricted
in the middle. Intercalary bands present in some marine species, septa absent. Cell wall with transapical,
delicately punctated striae; bilaterally symmetrical. Pseudoraphe absent, or narrow to very wide. Raphe absent.
Without special transapical ribs. With a larger or smaller clear field in the middle. Chromatophores single plates
to numerous small granules. Resting spores known from a few marine species.
Mainly littoral species. Common off southern California.
Species: 131. F. crotonensis (fig. 131)
131. Fragilaria crotonensis Kitton
Figure 131
1869. Sci. Gossip, vol. 5, p. 110, fig. 81.
Cells in girdle view widened in the middle and sometimes also at the ends. Held together in bands by the
center part or by the ends. Between the middle and the ends, with a lanceolate aperture; bands consequently
loose, comblike. Valves very small, lanceolate, in the center somewhat widened, the ends slightly enlarged and
rounded. Length 50–75µ; width 1.5–3µ. Transapical striae delicate, 12–16 in 10µ, in the middle interrupted
so that a small rectangular central area is present. Pseudoraphe very narrow linear.
Found near shore in brackish water. Not common off southern California. Only occasionally in plankton
collections. Neritic. North temperate to boreal species.
Fig. 131. Fragilaria crotonensis Kit. Six cells united in a band; length of cells, 62µ.
Fig. 132. Synedra undulata Bail. a, valve view of entire cell; length, 610µ; widths: center, 13µ;
narrowest part, 3µ. b, same cell in girdle view. c–e, parts of cell in valve view showing sculpturing. c,
end. d, narrowest part midway between end and center. e, widest center part.
Littoral species. Most common in enclosed regions such as Mission Bay near San Diego. South temperate
to subtropical species.
Genus XL. THALASSIONEMA Grunow
1880–85. In V. H. Syn., description of pl. 43, figs. 7–10.
Cells forming zigzag bands or star-shaped colonies, adjacent cells united to each other by small gelatinous
cushions on one cell end. In girdle view linear. Intercalary bands and septa absent. Valves linear to narrow
lancet-shaped. Valves with numerous tiny spines on the margin placed at regular intervals. Cell wall otherwise
structureless. Chromatophores more or less numerous small granules.
Only one species. Pelagic, marine.
Species: 133. T. nitzschioides (fig. 133)
133. Thalassionema nitzschioides Grunow
Figure 133
1880–85. In V. H. Syn., pl. 43, figs. 7–10.
Cells in girdle view narrow linear, often slightly curved. Valves narrow linear with parallel sides and blunt-
rounded ends. Length 30–80µ; width 2–3.5µ. Marginal spines
183
Fig. 133. Thalassionema nitzschioides Grun. a, chain with four recently divided cells in girdle view and
two cells in valve view; length of cells, 42µ. b, sections of cells in girdle view, from chain shown in (d).
c, valve view; length, 42µ; width, 3.5µ. d, chain, all cells in girdle view; length of cells, 53µ.
small, 10–12 in 10µ. Valves otherwise without sculpturing. Cells united into star-shaped colonies or zigzag
bands, frequently both types within a colony.
Neritic. North temperate species. Very common and often abundant off southern California and Lower
California, in the Gulf of California, and north to Scotch Cap, Alaska.
Genus XLI. THALASSIOTHRIX Cleve and Grunow
1880. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 17, no. 2, p. 108.
Cells living singly or forming star-shaped colonies, zigzag bands, or bunches, united to one another by a
gelatinous cushion on the end of the cell. In girdle view narrow linear. Intercalary bands and septa absent.
In valve view linear or slightly lancet-shaped, ends unlike. Valve borders similar to those of preceding genus,
often beset with small spines. Valve surface with short marginal striae or structureless. Chromatophores more
or less numerous small granules.
Pelagic marine forms. This genus contains the longest diatoms known at the present time. Often present in
large masses in the plankton.
Species: 134. T. longissima (fig. 134)
135. T. frauenfeldii (fig. 135)
136. T. mediterranea var. pacifica (fig. 136)
137. T. delicatula (fig. 137)
184
Fig. 134. Thalassiothrix longissima Cl. and Grun. a, entire cell; length, 1450µ; width at narrowest part,
3µ. b–f, sections of cell. b, end of cell, girdle view. c, section midway between end and center, girdle
view. d, section near center, valve view. e, section midway between center and end, valve view. f, end,
girdle view.
about 3 in 10µ in the middle part of the cell, fewer toward the ends or entirely absent. Sometimes the entire cell
is without marginal spines. Membrane with short marginal ribs, 14–16 in 10µ. Mucilage pore near the ends.
Oceanic. Arctic-boreal to north temperate species. Not uncommon off California but never in large numbers.
Present in Gulf of California and north to Scotch Cap, Alaska.
135. Thalassiothrix frauenfeldii Grunow
Figure 135
1880. In Cleve and Grunow. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 17, no.2, p. 109.
Cells united into star-shaped colonies or zigzag bands. In girdle view linear. Valves very narrow linear, ends
distinct but only slightly unlike, one end blunt-rounded, near
185
Fig. 135. Thalassiothrix frauenfeldii Grun. a, colony of seven cells; length of cells, 132µ. b, ends of
cells joined together, girdle view. c, two ends of a cell in valve view.
the other end usually widened then decreased to form a wedge-shaped point. Valves 90–210µ long, 2–4µ wide.
Marginal spines small but regular, 6–9 in 10µ. Valves otherwise structureless.
Oceanic. South temperate species. Widespread. Common, sometimes present in large numbers up to nearly
200,000 cells per liter off southern California in August, 1926. Common in Gulf of California and north to
Scotch Cap, Alaska.
136. Thalassiothrix mediterranea Pavillard
1916. Rech. Diat. pélag. Golfe du Lion, p. 39, pl. 2, fig. 3.
Variety pacifica n. var.
Figure 136 (p. 186)
Cells delicate, very slender. United into star- or fan-shaped colonies by the valve surfaces of the wedge-
shaped point. Valves very narrow linear, 525–1076µ. long (most commonly 625–850µ). Basal pole slightly
wedge- or quill-shaped, blunt-pointed, 3–5µ at widest point. About one-third the length of the cell from the
basal pole, valve slightly enlarged, then narrower again, 1.5–2.5µ, to near head end which is rounded and
2.5–4µ across at the widest point. In girdle view basal end more sharply wedge-shaped, 5–7µ at widest point,
then 3–4µ wide for a short distance to about one-third the length of the cell where the slight thickening (5.5–6µ)
occurs, then again narrower (1.8–3µ), until near head end which is wider (3–5µ) and cut off abruptly. Cell
sometimes partly twisted at narrow region near head end. Marginal spines lacking, but spinelike projections at
corners of head end. Valve surface and valve mantle delicately striated. Striae punctate
186
Fig. 136. Thalassiothrix mediterranea var. pacifica Cupp. a, entire cell; length, 745µ. b, colony of six
cells; length of cells, 580µ. c, basal ends of cells shown in (b). d, sections of a cell in valve view. e, head
end of cell shown in (d), focus slightly higher to show spines at corners (note mucilage pore). f, head and
basal poles of a cell in girdle view.
(see fig. E, 1, p). Transapical striae 16–19 in 10µ. Pseudoraphe very narrow linear (fig. E, 1, ps).
Chromatophores small, numerous, roundish to oval. Mucilage pore at head end.
Differs from the type mainly by the coarser striation, 16–19 in 10µ in the variety, 21–24 in 10µ in the type.
Temperate to south temperate species. Present off southern California, sometimes in moderately large
numbers, and in the Gulf of California.
187
Fig. 137. Thalassiothrix delicatula Cupp. a, entire cell (except section of the center); length, 1590µ (cell
ends in girdle view; narrow portion, valve view). b, sections of cell shown in (a). c, sections of same cell
turned so that ends are in valve view (center section, girdle view).
188
Fig. 138. Asterionella japonica Cl. a–i, colonies; lengths of entire cells: a, 110µ; b, 42µ; c, 150µ; d,
58µ; e, 30µ; f, 87µ; g, 70µ; h, 40µ; i, 55µ. j, cell in girdle view; length, 67µ (note striations). k, cell in
valve view; length, 55µ; width at widest part of head, 8µ.
base. Length of valve 30–150µ; length of enlarged region 10–23µ; width of enlarged part 8–12µ. Transapical
striae very delicate, 28–34 in 10µ. Chromatophores one or two small plates, in basal enlarged part only.
Neritic. South temperate species. Widespread. Often in large numbers. Up to 1,360,000 cells per liter
recorded off La Jolla in August, 1927.
190
Fig. 139. Asterionella kariana Grun. a–e, parts of five colonies; lengths of cells: a, 50µ; b, 60µ; c, 18µ;
d, 54µ; e, 29µ.
the middle to the end. Length 16–68µ. Chromatophores several small plates in each cell, scattered throughout
the cell.
Neritic. Boreal-arctic species. Not recorded off southern California. Abundant only in northern waters.
Genus XLIII. PSEUDOEUNOTIA Grunow
1880–85. In V. H. Syn., pl. 35 (in part).
Cells united into bands by the valve surfaces. Colonies have appearance of sections of a barrel. Cells
in ventral girdle view linear, dorsal view with slightly convex margins. Valves dorsiventral, with strongly
arched back margin. Valve surface with thin transapical ribs, the membrane lying between the ribs delicately
areolated-punctated. Pseudoraphe and central area absent.
Only one species.
Species: 140. P. doliolus (fig. 140)
140. Pseudoeunotia doliolus (Wallich) Grunow
Figure 140
1860. Wallich. Trans. Micr. Soc., N.S., vol. 8, p. 48, pl. 2, fig. 19 (Synedra doliolus).
1880–85. Grunow. In V. H. Syn., pl. 35, fig. 22.
Colony formation and girdle view as described for the genus. Valves half -lancet-shaped with blunt-rounded
ends. One side of valve straight or slightly concave, seldom slightly
191
convex; other side (back) more strongly convex, gradually decreasing toward the ends and near the ends often
slightly constricted. Length 40–60µ; width 6–8µ. Transapical ribs 10–14 in 10µ. Double row of areolae in
quineunx, 20–21 rows in 10µ. Pseudoraphe and central area absent.
Fig. 140. Pseudoeunotia doliolus (Wall.) Grun. a, colony; length of cells, 43µ. b, valve view; length,
60µ; width, 7µ. c, sketch of part of a cell in girdle view.
Neritic (and littoral) species. Most common in warmer seas. Moderately abundant in Gulf of California
(Cupp and Allen, 1938).
B-2. MONORAPHIDEAE
V. ACHNANTHOIDEAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl-Prantl, Nat. Pfianzenf., p. 120.
double rows of puncta, seldom with the space between the rows of puncta thickened into strong ribs, or with
the entire cell wall areolated. Chromatophores one lying along the valve without a raphe, two or four plates
lying along the girdle, or in one species (A. longipes) numerous small platelets.
Chiefly littoral species.
Species: 141. A. longipes (fig. 141)
141. Achnanthes longipes Agardh
Figure 141
1832. Consp. crit. Diat., p. 58.
Valves linear with more or less wedge-shaped ends and usually somewhat constricted sides to linear-elliptical
with broad rounded ends, 60–100µ long, 10–30µ wide. Valve without a raphe with an axial, very narrow
pseudoraphe (siliceous rib), without a central area. Valve with a raphe with a threadlike, slightly curved raphe,
axial area narrow, central area a narrow cross band reaching to the margin; central knot stauroid; stauros very
narrow. Structure of both valves alike: strong transapical ribs, usually at right
Fig. 141. Achnanthes longipes Ag. a, part of a band, girdle view; width of band, 77µ. b, section through
center of a cell, girdle view.
angles to the middle line, near the poles slightly radial, 6–8 in 10µ. Between the ribs two (seldom four)
rows of delicate areolae, 10–12 in 10µ. Cells in girdle view strongly curved, valve mantle high and rather
strongly convex. Girdle bands with delicately punctated striae parallel to the pervalvar axis, 10–13 in 10µ.
Chromatophores numerous small platelets.
Littoral, but found fairly often in plankton collections. North temperate species.
B-3. BIRAPHIDEAE
VI. NAVICULOIDEAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pfianzenf., p. 122.
11. NAVICULEAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pfianzenf., p. 122.
Genus XLV. NAVICULA Bory
1822. Dict. class. hist. nat., vol. 2, p. 562.
Cells usually free, motile. In plankton species usually united into ribbonlike chains. Valves linear to
elliptical, with rounded, capitate or rostrate ends. Axial and central areas usually distinct. Striae or costae
parallel or radiate, finely or coarsely punctate,
193
lineate or apparently smooth. Both valves with raphe and central nodule but without keel. (See fig. B.)
Chromatophores two, in bands, one on each zone, sometimes extending over the valves. In some species
the chromatophores are on the valves. Some with four bands, others eight. One species known in which
chromatophores are granular.
Species: 142. N. membranacea (fig. 142)
143. N. distans (fig. 143)
142. Navicula membranacea Cleve
Figure 142
1897. Treat. phytopl. Atl. trib., p. 24, pl. 2, figs. 25–28.
Cells delicate, thin-walled. United into short, straight chains, 30–50µ wide. In girdle view rectangular.
Valves flat or slightly concave in the center, with a thickening in the middle at right angles to the raphe.
In valve view cells are narrow elliptical, acute. Girdle zone striated. No structure visible. Central nodule
dilated into a narrow stauros that reaches to the margin. Notches at point of union of valve mantle and girdle.
Chromatophores two, drawn out like a ribbon. Several pyrenoids present.
Fig. 142. Navicula membranacea CL. Part of a chain showing one complete cell; width, 34µ.
Fig. 143. Navicula distans (W. Sm.) Ralfs. a, valve; view; length, 70µ; width, 13µ. b, girdle view of
same cell.
Neritic. Truly planktonic. Temperate species. Found occasionally of southern California and in Gulf of
California.
143. Navicula distans (W. Smith) Ralfs
Figure 143
1853. W. Smith. Syn. Brit. Diat., vol. 1, p. 56, pl. 18, fig. 169 (Pinnularia distans).
1861. Ralfs. In Pritchard, Infus., p. 907.
Cells free. In girdle view rectangular, slightly constricted in the middle; in valve view lanceolate. Length of
valves 70–120µ; width 14–18µ. Coarsely striate (costate), about 6
194
striae in 10µ. Central clear area distinct. Striae radiate with finer striations across them. Two chromatophores,
one at each side of the girdle.
Littoral, but occurs occasionally in the plankton.
Genus XLVI. GYROSIGMA Hassall
1845. Hist. Brit. freshw. alg., vol. 1, p. 435, pl. 102, fig. 11.
1894. Emended by Cleve. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 26, no. 2, p. 112.
Valves linear or lanceolate. Usually sigmoid. Axial area very narrow. Central area small. Striae punctate,
in transverse and longitudinal rows. Chromatophores two, in long and narrow bands, one on each valve, the
margins serrated in marine forms. Pyrenoids present in all species.
Species: 144. G. spencerii (fig. 144)
144. Gyrosigma spencerii (Quekett) Cleve
Figure 144
1848. Quekett. Treat. microscope, p. 440 (Navicula spencerii).
1853. W. Smith. Syn. Brit. Diat., vol. 1, p. 68, pl. 22, fig. 218 (Pleurosigma spencerii.
1894. Cleve. Kongl. Svensk. Vet. -Akad. Handl., vol. 26, no. 2, p. 117.
Fig. 144. Gyrosigma spencerii (Quek.) Cl. a, entire cell; length, 150µ. width, 17µ. b, end of cell
showing striations. c, center of cell showing striations. d, diagram indicating direction and number of
transverse and longitudinal striae.
Valves sigmoid, lanceolate, with obtuse ends. Raphe central. Central nodule elliptical.
Transverse striae 17–19 in 10µ; longitudinal striae 24–26 in 10µ. Length of valves 150–237µ. Brackish-and
fresh-water species. Found occasionally in plankton collections taken near shore. Bottom or littoral species.
Genus XLVII. PLEUROSIGMA W. Smith
1852. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2, vol. 9, p. 1.
1894. Emended by Cleve. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 26, no. 2, p. 32.
Valves linear to lanceolate, usually sigmoid. Raphe usually sigmoid, central or excentric. Striae finely
punctate in oblique and transverse lines. Central nodule usually small and rounded. Cells narrow in girdle
view, with narrow connective zone, sometimes twisted or arcuate, or constricted in the middle. Chromatophores
usually two bands, one on each valve. Each band is lobed or indented and sometimes differs in opposite valves.
Numerous pyrenoids present in most forms.
Littoral or bottom species, often occurring in the plankton.
Species: 145. P. nicobaricum (fig. 145)
146. P. hamuliferum (fig. 146)
147. P. elongatum (fig. 147)
148. P. normanii (fig. 148)
195
Fig. 145. Pleurosigma nicobaricum Grun. a, entire cell; length, 130µ; width, 25µ. b, section of center
of cell showing striations. c, diagram indicating direction and number of oblique and transverse striae.
Fig. 146. Pleurosigma hamuliferum Brun and Temp. a, entire cell; length, 53µ; width, 13.5µ (striations
indicated). b, diagram indicating direction and number of oblique and transverse striae.
23–25 in 10µ; oblique striae 20–22 in 10µ. Striae punctate. Length of valves 120–150µ; width 25µ.
Reported off southern California occasionally.
146. Pleurosigma hamuliferum Brun and Tempère
Figure 146
1889. Mém. Soc. Phys. Hist. Nat. Genève, vol. 30, no. 9, p. 48, pl. 9, fig. 5.
Valves rhombic-rounded, slightly oblique. Ends broad, rounded. Raphe straight, oblique, ending in broad
curves in opposite directions. Striae punctate. Transverse and oblique striae at an angle of about 65°,
equidistant, 21–24 in 10µ. Length of valves 50–70µ; width 13–15µ.
Rare. Reported only occasionally off southern California.
196
Fig. 147. Pleurosigma elongatum W. Sm. a, entire cell; length, 190µ; width, 16µ. b, sections (end
and center) of cell shown in (a) with striations indicated. c, diagram indicating direction and number of
oblique and transverse striae.
Fig. 148. Pleurosigma normanii Ralfs. a, entire cell; length, 94µ; width, 14µ. b, end of cell shown in
(a). c, center of same cell. d, diagram indicating direction and number of oblique and transverse striae.
Fig. 149. Tropidoneis lepidoptera (Greg.) Cl. Cell in girdle view; length, 260µ; width at widest point,
65µ.
Fig. 150. Tropidoneis antarctica var. polyplasta Gran and Angst. a–c, entire cells. a, length, 215µ (cell
slightly turned). b, length, 217µ; width at widest point, 68µ (note chromatophores). c, length, 275µ;
width at widest point, 85µ. d, section of center of valve of cell illustrated in (a) showing striations. e,
section near end of cell shown in (c).
Fig. 151. Amphiprora gigantea var. sulcata (O’M.) Cl. a, entire cell; length, 105µ. b, sections of center
and end of same cell showing striations.
Fig. 152. Nitzschia bilobata var. minor Grun. a, cell in girdle view; length, 63µ. b, same cell in valve
view; width, 6µ.
Fig. 153. Nitzschia closterium (Ehr.) W. Sm. a, cell 86µ long. b, cell 41µ long. c, cell 66µ long. Note
chromatophores.
Fig. 154. Nitzschia longissima (Bréb.) Ralfs. a, part of a cell showing keel and keel puncta. b, entire cell
with chromatophores; length, 209µ. c, center of cell shown in (d). d, entire cell; length, 127µ.
Valves linear-lanceolate. Ends extended into very long horns. Keel puncta 8–14 in 10µ. Striae about 16 in
10µ, often difficult to see. Length of valves 125–250µ. Chromatophores as in N. closterium.
Littoral species, frequently found in the plankton. Never in large numbers.
155. Nitzschia seriata Cleve
Figure 155 (p.202)
1883. Vega-Exped. Vetensk. Iakttag., vol. 3, p. 478, pl. 38, fig. 75.
Cells spindle-shaped with more or less pointed to moderately rounded ends. United into stiff, hairlike chains
by the overlapping points of the cells. Chains motile as a whole. Length of valves 80–140µ (most commonly
95–115µ); width 6.2–8µ (usually 6.5–7µ). Keel puncta indistinct, obsolete or nearly so, about the same number
as the striae. Striae 14–19 in 10µ, punctate. Chromatophores two per cell, one on each side of the central
nucleus.
Northern to arctic, neritic species. Present in large numbers at Scotch Cap, Alaska. Recorded by Gran (1912)
as an arctic, oceanic species.
202
Fig. 155. Nitzschia seriata C1. a, cell 102µ long, 6µ wide, valve view; striae, 17 in 10µ. b, chain with
chromatophores, valve view; length of cells, 102µ. c, cell 90µ long, 7µ wide, valve view; striae, 15 in
10µ. d, chain, valve view; cells 88µ long, 6.5µ wide. Note chromatophores.
of the same number as the striae. Striae 11–16 (usually 13–14) in 10µ, punctate. Chromatophores two plates
in each cell, one at each side of the central nucleus, lying along the cell wall under normal conditions. Closely
related to N. seriata but cells more pointed, valves narrower, and usually with greater overlapping of cell ends.
Striae often visible in water mounts. Distinguished from the type chiefly by greater number of striae (10 in 10µ
in the type).
Neritic. Temperate species. Common off southern California and Lower California, and in the Gulf of
California. Distribution and abundance uncertain because of frequent confusion with N. seriata and N. pacifica.
157. Nitzschia pacifica n. sp.
Figure 157
Cells spindle-shaped with more or less pointed ends. United into stiff chains by the overlapping points of
the cells as in N. seriata, N. pungens var. atlantica, and N. delicatissima. Chains motile as a whole. Length
of valves 55–118µ; width 4.5–7.5µ. Keel puncta distinct, 12–19 in 10µ. Striations punctate, 20–36 in 10µ
(about twice as many striations as keel puncta on a valve). Chromatophores two per cell, one on each side of
the nucleus. Asexual auxospore formation observed (fig. 157, g–k). (See also fig. E, 2, 3, 4.)
Neritic or possibly oceanic temperate species. Very abundant at times off southern California and Lower
California, and in the Gulf of California. Also present at Scotch Cap, Alaska, along with N.seriata.
In general appearance in water mounts the species is frequently almost indistinguishable from N. pungens
var. atlantica, N. seriata, and N. delicatissima. The presence of distinct keel puncta and finer striae, the
distribution in warmer waters, and the less robust appearance were deciding factors in establishing it as a new
species separate from N. seriata. Nitzschia fraudulenta (Cleve, 1897b, p. 300, fig. 11), a synonym of N.
seriata according to Gran and Angst (1931), was originally described as much more delicate and with finer
striations (23 in 10µ) than N. seriata. However, it has not been described as having distinct keel puncta. This
fact appears to eliminate the possibility that it might be a synonym of N. pacifica. Nitzschia pungens and its
variety atlantica are more closely related to N. seriata in structure than is N. pacifica. Meunier (1910, p. 334,
pl. 34, figs. 38–40) showed keel puncta on specimens which he called N. seriata. His figures may represent
individuals belonging to N. pacifica.
158. Nitzschia delicatissimma Cleve
Figure 158 (p. 206)
1897. Treat. phytopl. Atl. trib., p. 24, pl. 2, fig. 22.
Valve narrow, linear, acute. Cells united into stiff, hairlike chains by the overlapping tips of the cells. Chains
usually short, motile. Length of valves 32–85µ; width 1.3–2.8µ. Keel slightly excentric; keel puncta 14–25
in 10µ. No striae visible. Chromatophores two per cell, one on either side of the central nucleus. Asexual
auxospore formation observed (fig. 158, h–i). Similar in general appearance to N. pacifica but more delicate.
Neritic. Widespread. Karsten (1906) gave N. delicatissima as one of the six truly bipolar diatom species.
Common off California and north. Probably often confused with N. pacifica.
Fig. 157. Nitzschia pacifica Cupp. a and b, same cell. a, valve view. b, girdle view. Length, 86µ; width
of valve, 5.2µ; striae, 26–27 in 10µ; keel puncta, 13–14 in 10µ. c, cross section of a cell. d, chain with
cells dividing, girdle view; length of cells, 75µ. e, valve view of chain in (d). f, chain with cells breaking
apart after division. g–k, chains with auxospores. g and h, same chain. g, girdle view. h, valve view.
Length of cells, 97µ. i, auxospore in center of chain; length of cells, 67µ; width of auxospore, 15µ;
width of other cells, 7.5µ. j and k, two views of same chain. j, valve view. k, girdle view. Length of cells,
62µ; width of auxospore, 17µ; width of other cells, 8µ. l, two cells with epiphytic protozoa attached.
(Bicoeca mediterranea or related species). Sometimes as many as 28 protozoa are attached to one cell.
206
Fig. 158. Nitzschia delicatissima Cl. a and b, same cell. a, valve view. b, girdle view. Length, 88µ;
width of valve, 1.5µ; puncta, 20–22 in 10µ. c–f, chains. c, valve view; length, 63µ. d, same chain as in
(c), girdle view; cells dividing. e, girdle view, cells dividing; length, 63µ. f, girdle view; length of cells,
65µ. g, cross section of a cell. h and i, chains with auxospores.
Fig. 159. Nitzschia paradoxa (Gmel.) Grun. a, colony, girdle view; length of cells, 107µ. b, another
colony, girdle view; length of cells, 87µ. c, ends of cells in a colony, girdle view. d, valve view of part of
a cell; width, 5µ; keel puncta, 7–8 in 10µ; striae, 20 in 10µ.
Cells united into movable colonies, the cells sliding along one another. In girdle view rectangular. In valve
view linear-lanceolate with produced ends. Keel nearly central. Keel puncta 7–9 in 10µ. Striae 20–21 in 10µ.
Length of valves 80–115µ; width 5–6µ. Chromatophores small, numerous. Nucleus central.
Littoral marine and brackish-water species. Occasionally present in plankton collections.
VIII. SURIRELLOIDEAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf.,p. 145.
14. SURIRELLEAE Schütt
1896. Bacill. in Engl.-Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf., p. 145.
Genus LI. SURIRELLA Turpin
1828. Mém. Mus. Hist. Nat., vol. 16, p. 361, pl. 15, figs. 1–7, 9–11, 14.
Cells single. In girdle view linear or wedge-shaped. Valves linear, elliptical or oval, sometimes constricted.
Costae long or short, extending toward the center but not quite to it, with intermediate striae more or less
evident. Central space linear or lanceolate, often obscure. Valves with a longitudinal central pseudoraphe and
marginal, more or less elevated, undulated keel produced into winglike expansions containing the raphe on
each side. Pseudoraphes of the two valves parallel. Raphe difficult to see. Distinct canal pores usually visible.
Valve surface nearly flat, rarely spirally twisted.
Bottom and littoral forms found occasionally in the plankton.
Species: 160. S. fastuosa var. recedens (fig. 160)
208
Fig. 160. Surirella fastuosa var. recedens (A. Schm.) Cl. Entire valve; length, 70µ; width, 40µ.
is characteristic of the variety. Marginal striae distinct, 17–19 in 10µ. Striae in central field 17–20 in 10µ.
Length of valves 54–80µ; width 30–45µ. Figure 28 on plate 24 of Schmidt’s Atlas is a drawing of a specimen
from California.
Not common. Found occasionally in the plankton collections off southern California and Lower California.
LITERATURE CITED
AGARDH, C. A.
1921. ‘Some work on marine phytoplankton in 1919’. Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc., vol. 40, pp.177–181.
1922. ‘Quantitative studies on inshore marine diatoms and dinoflagellates of southern California in 1920’.
Univ. Calif. Publ. Zoöl., vol. 22, pp.369–378, 1fig.
1923. ‘Observations on surface distribution of marine diatoms of Lower California in 1921’. Proc. Calif.
Acad. Sci., vol. 12, pp.437–442.
1924. ‘Observations on surface distribution of marine diatoms of Lower California in 1922’. Ecology, vol.
5, pp.389–392, 1fig.
1927a. ‘Quantitative studies on inshore marine diatoms and dinoflagellates of southern California in 1921’.
Bull. Scripps Inst. Oceanog., Tech. Ser., vol. 1, pp.19–29, 1fig.
1927b. ‘Quantitative studies on inshore marine diatoms and dinoflagellates of southern California in 1922’.
Ibid., pp.31–38, 2figs.
1927c. ‘Surface catches of marine diatoms and dinoflagellates made by U.S.S. “Pioneer” in Alaskan waters
in 1923’. Ibid., pp.39–48, 2figs.
1928a. ‘Catches of marine diatoms and dinoflagellates taken by boat in southern California waters in 1926’.
Ibid., pp.201–245, 6figs.
1928b. ‘Quantitative studies of inshore marine diatoms and dinoflagellates collected in southern California
in 1924’. Ibid., pp.347–356, 1fig.
1928c. ‘Review of five years of studies on phytoplankton at southern California piers, 1920–1924 inclusive’.
Ibid., pp.357–401, 5figs.
1929a. ‘Surface catches of marine diatoms and dinoflagellates made by U.S.S. “Pioneer” in Alaskan waters
in 1924’. Ibid., vol. 2, pp.139–153, 2figs.
1929b. ‘Ten years of statistical studies of marine phytoplankton at the Scripps Institution of Oceanography’.
Science, vol. 70, pp.416–419.
1930. ‘Quantitative studies of surface catches of marine diatoms and dinoflagellates taken in Alaskan waters
by the International Fisheries Commission in the fall and winter of 1927–1928 and 1929’. Bull. Scripps
Inst. Oceanog., Tech. Ser., vol. 2, pp.389–399.
1932. ‘Problems of flotation and deposition of marine plankton diatoms’. Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc., vol. 51,
pp.1–7.
1933. ‘Surface phytoplankton obtained by the Templeton Crocker expedition of the California Academy of
Sciences of 1932’. Ibid., vol. 52, pp.101–102.
1934a. ‘Marine plankton diatoms of Lower California in 1931’. Bot. Gaz., vol. 95, pp.485–492, 1fig.
1934b. ‘The primary food supply of the sea’. Quart. Review Biol., vol. 9, pp.161–180, 3figs.
1936. ‘Occurrence of marine plankton diatoms in a ten-year series of daily catches in southern California’.
Amer. Jour. Bot., vol. 23, pp.60–63.
1937. ‘Plankton diatoms of the Gulf of California obtained by the G. Allan Hancock expedition of 1936’.
Univ. South. Calif. Press, Hancock Pacific Exped., vol. 3, pp.47–59, 1fig.
1938. ‘The Templeton Crocker expedition to the Gulf of California in 1935—the phytoplankton’. Trans.
Amer. Micr. Soc., vol. 57, pp.328–335, 1fig.
1939. ‘Surface distribution of marine plankton diatoms in the Panama region in 1933’. Bull. Scripps Inst.
Oceanog., Tech. Ser., vol. 4, pp.181–196, 4figs.
209
210
1927. ‘Surface catches of marine diatoms and dinoflagellates from Pacific high seas in 1925 and 1926’. Bull.
Scripps Inst. Oceanog., Tech. Ser., vol. 1, pp.197–200.
APSTEIN, C.
1909. ‘Chaetoceras gracile Schütt und Chaetoceras vistulae n. sp. Wiss. Meeresunters., Abt. Kiel, N.F.’,
vol. 11, pp.133–137, 2figs.
ASKENASY, E.
1867. ‘Beiträge zur Kenntniss des Chlorophylls und einiger dasselbe begleitender Farbstoffe’. Bot. Zeit.,
vol. 25, pp.225–230, 233–238.
ATKINS, W. R. G.
1923a. ‘The phosphate content of fresh and salt waters in’ its relationship to the growth of the algal
plankton’. Mar. Biol. Assn. U.K., Jour., vol. 13, pp.119–150.
1923b. ‘The silica content of some natural waters and of culture media’. Ibid., pp.151–159.
1926a. ‘Seasonal changes in the silica content of natural waters in relation to the phytoplankton’. Ibid., vol.
14, pp.89–99.
1926b. ‘A quantitative consideration of some factors concerned in plant growth in water’. Conseil Perm.
Internat. Explor. de la Mer, Jour., vol. 1, pp.99–126, 197–226.
1926c. ‘The phosphate content of sea water in relation to the growth of the algal plankton’. Mar. Biol. Assn.
U.K., Jour., vol. 14, pp.447–467.
1928. ‘Seasonal variations in the phosphate and silicate content of sea water during 1926 and 1927 in relation
to the phytoplankton crop’. Ibid., vol. 15, pp.191–205.
1930. ‘Seasonal variations in the phosphate and silicate content of sea water in relation to the phytoplankton
crop. Part V. November, 1927, to April, 1929, compared with earlier years from 1923’. Ibid., vol. 16,
pp.821–852, 12figs.
BACHRACH, E., and LEFÈVRE, M.
1929. ‘Contribution à l’étude du r}le de la silice chez les êtres vivants. Observations sur la biologie des
Diatomées’. Jour. Phys. Pathol. Génér., vol. 27, pp.241–249.
BAILEY, J. W.
1842. ‘A sketch of the Infusoria, of the family Bacillaria, with some account of the most interesting species
which have been found in a Recent or fossil state in the United States’. Amer. Jour. Sci., vol. 42,
pp.88–105, pl. 2; vol. 43, pp.321–332, pl. 5.
1845. ‘Notice of some new localities of Infusoria, fossil and Recent’. Ibid., vol. 48, pp.321–343, pl. 4.
1851. ‘Microscopical examination of soundings made by the U.S. Coast Survey off the Atlantic coast of the
United States’. Smithson. Contrib. Knowl., vol. 2, pp.1–15, pl. 1.
1854. ‘Notes on new species and localities of microscopical organisms’. Ibid., vol. 7, pp.1–16, pl. 1.
1856. ‘Notice of microscopic forms found in the soundings of the sea of Kamtschatka’. Amer. Jour. Sci.,
Ser. II, vol. 22, pp.1–6, pl. 1.
BAILEY, L. W.
1862. ‘Notes on new species of microscopical organisms, chiefly from the Para River, South America’.
Boston Jour. Nat. Hist., vol. 7, pp.329–352, pls. 7–8.
BERGON, P.
1903. ‘Etudes sur la flore diatomique du Bassin d’Arcachon et des parages de l’Atlantique voisins de cette
station’. Bull. Soc. Sci. Arcachon, Sta. Biol., vol. 6.
BIGELOW, H. B.
1926. ‘Plankton of the offshore waters of the Gulf of Maine’. Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., vol. 40, pt.2, pp.1–509.
211
1930. ‘Reconnaissance of the waters and plankton of Monterey Bay, July, 1928’. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoöl.,
Harvard Col., vol. 70, pp.429–581.
BORY DE SAINT VINCENT, J. B. M.
1822. ‘Dictionnaire classique d’histoire naturelle. 1822–1831. Paris, Baudoin Frères’. Diatomaceae
scattered throughout the 17 vols. in alphabetical arrangement. Pl. 51, figs. 1–2; pl. 54, figs. 1, 3.
BOYER, C. S.
1926–27. ‘Synopsis of North American Diatomaceae’. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia. Part I.
Coscinodiscatae, Rhizosolenatae, Biddulphiatae, Fragilariatae, vol. 78, 1926 suppl., pp.1–228. Part II.
Naviculatae, Surirellatae, vol. 79, 1927 suppl., pp.229–583.
BRANDT, K.
1902. ‘Ueber den Stoffwechsel im Meere. Part 2’. Wiss. Meeresunters., Abt. Kiel, N.F., vol. 6, pp.25–79.
BRÉBISSON, ALPHONSE DE
1857. ‘Description de quelques nouvelles Diatomées observées dans le guano du Pérou, formant le genre
Spatangidium’. ‘Bull. Soc. Linn. Normandie’, vol. 2, pp.292–298, pl. 3. (Reprinted in Ann. Sci. Nat.,
IV, Bot., vol. 9, pp.91–96, pl. 4. 1858.)
BRÉBISSON, ALPHONSE DE, and GODEY
1838. ‘Considerations sur les Diatomées et essai d’une classification des genres et des espèces appartenant
à cette famille’. Falaise. 20pp.
BRIGHTWELL, THOMAS
1856. ‘On the filamentous, long-horned Diatomaceae, with a description of two new species’. Quart. Jour.
Micr. Sci., vol. 4, pp.105–109, pl. 7.
1858a. ‘Remarks on the genus Bhizosolenia of Ehrenberg’. Ibid., vol. 6, pp.93–95, pl. 5.
1858b. ‘Further observations on the genera Triceratium and Chaetoceros’. Ibid., pp.153–155, pl. 8.
1859. ‘On some of the rarer or undescribed species of Diatomaceae’. Ibid., vol. 7, pp.179–181, pl. 9.
BRUN, JACQUES, and TEMPÈRE, J.
1889. ‘Diatomées fossiles du Japon. Espèces marines & nouvelles des calcaires argileux de Sendaï & de
Yedo. Mém’. Soc. Phys. Hist. Nat. Genève, vol. 30, pp.1–75, pls. 1–9.
CASTRACANE, F.
1875. ‘Contribuzione alla florula delle Diatomee del Mediterraneo’. Atti del’Acad. Pont. Nuov. Linc., vol.
28. Rome.
1886. Report on the Diatomaceae collected by H.M.S. “Challenger” during the years 1873–1876. Report on
the scientific results of the voyage of H.M.S. “Challenger” during the years 1873–76, under the command
of Captain George S. Nares, R.N., F.R.S., and the late Captain Frank Tourle Thompson, R.N. Botany, vol.
2, pp.1–178, pls. 1–30. London.
CHOLNOKY, B. v.
1929. ‘Symbiose zwischen Diatomeen’. Arch. Protistenk., vol. 66, pp.523–530, 4figs.
CLEVE, P. T.
1873a. ‘Examination of diatoms found on the surface of the Sea of Java’. Bih. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad.
Handl., vol. 1, no.11, pp.1–13, pls. 1–3.
1873b. ‘On diatoms from the Arctic Sea’. Ibid., no.13, pp.1–28, pls. 1–4.
1878. ‘Diatoms from the West Indian Archipelago’. Ibid., vol. 5, no. 8, pp.1–22, pls. 1–5.
212
1881. ‘On some new and little known diatoms’. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 18, no.5, pp.1–28,
pls. 1–6.
1883. ‘Diatoms collected during the expedition of the “Vega.” Vega-Exped’. Vetensk. Arbet. Iakttag., vol.
3, pp.457–517, pls. 35–38.
1889. ‘Pelagiske Diatomeer från Kattegat. Det Videnskabelige Udbytte af Kanonbaaden “Hauch’s” Togter i
de danske Have. Part I’. Copenhagen.
1891. ‘Remarques sur le genre Amphiprora’. Le Diatomiste, vol. 1, pp.51–54.
1894. ‘Planktonuntersökningar. Cilioflagellater og Diatomaceer’. Bih. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl.,
vol. 20, pt.3, no.2. Stockholm.
1894–95. ‘Synopsis of the Naviculoid diatoms. Part I’. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 26, no.2,
pp.1–194, pls. 1–5. 1894. Part II. Ibid., vol. 27, no.3, pp.1–219, pls. 1–4. 1895. Stockholm.
1896a. ‘Diatoms from Baffins Bay and Davis Strait, collected by M. E. Nilsson’. Bih. Kongl. Svensk.
Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 22, pt.3, no.4, pp.1–22, pls. 1–2. Stockholm.
1896b. ‘Planktonuntersökningar. Vegetabilisk Plankton’. Ibid., no.5. Stockholm.
1897a. ‘A treatise on the phytoplankton of the Atlantic and its tributaries and on the periodical changes of
the plankton of Skagerak’, pp.1–28, pls. 1–4. Upsala.
1897b. ‘Report on the phytoplankton collected on the expedition of H.M.S. “Research,” 1896’. Fifteenth
Ann. Rep. Fish. Board for Scotland, pt.3, pp.297–304, pl. 8.
1900a. ‘The plankton of the North Sea, the English Channel, and the Skagerak in 1898’. Kongl. Svensk.
Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 32, no.8, pp.1–53.
1900b. ‘Notes on some Atlantic plankton-organisms’. Ibid., vol. 34, no. 1, pp.1–22, pls. 1–8.
CLEVE, P. T., and GARUNOW, ALBERT
1880. ‘Beiträge zur Kenntniss der Arctischen Diatomeen’. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. 17, no.2,
pp.1–121, pls. 1–7.
CLEVE, P. T., and MÖLLER, J. D.
1925. ‘A technique for type mounts of plankton diatoms and other microplankton’. Jour. Roy. Micr. Soc.,
London, vol. for 1925, pp.43–47, 1fig.
COOPER, L. H. N.
1933. ‘Chemical constituents of biological importance in the English Channel, November, 1930, to January,
1932’. Mar. Biol. Assn. U.K., Jour., vol. 18, pp.677–728.
CUPP, E. E.
1930. ‘Quantitative studies of miscellaneous series of surface catches of marine diatoms and dinoflagellates
taken between Seattle and the Canal Zone from 1924 to 1928’. Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc., vol. 49,
pp.238–245.
1934. ‘Analysis of marine plankton diatom collections taken from the Canal Zone to California during
March, 1933’. Ibid., vol. 53, pp.22–29, 1fig.
1937. ‘Seasonal distribution and occurrence of marine diatoms and dinoflagellates at Scotch Cap, Alaska’.
Bull. Scripps Inst. Oceanog., Tech. Ser., vol. 4, pp.71–100, 7figs.
CUPP, E. E., and ALLEN, W. E.
1938. ‘Plankton diatoms of the Gulf of California obtained by Allan Hancock Pacific expedition of 1937’.
Univ. South. Calif. Press, Allan Hancock Pacific Exped., vol. 3, pp.61–99, pls. 4–15.
213
EHRENBERG, C. G.
1830. ‘Organisation, Systematik und Geographisches Verhältniss der Infusions-thierchen’. Phys. Abh.
Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1830. 8 pls.
1838. ‘Die Infusionsthierchen als vollkommene Organismen. Ein Blick in das tiefere organische Leben der
Natur’. Leipzig, Leopold Voss. xviii + 548 pp., 65 pls.
1840. ‘Ueber die Bildung der Kreidefelsen und des Kreidemergels durch unsichtbare Organismen’. Phys.
Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1838, pp. 59–147, pls. 1–4.
1841. ‘Ueber noch jetzt Zahlreich lebende Thierarten der Kreidebildung und den Organismus der Poly-
thalmien’. Ibid., 1839, pp. 1–174, pls. 1–4.
1843. ‘Verbreitung und Einfluss des mikroskopischen Lebens in Süd- und Nord-Amerika’. Ibid., 1841, pp.
291–446, pls. 1–4.
1845a. ‘Mittheilung über zwei neue Lager von Gebirgsmassen aus Infusorien als Meeresabsatz in Nord-
Amerika und eine Vergleichung derselben mit den organischen Kreidegebilden in Europa und Afrika’.
Ber. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1844, pp. 57–97.
1845b. ‘Einige vorläufige Resultate der Untersuchungen der von der Südpolreise des Capitain Ross, so wie
von den Herren Schayer und Darwin zugekommenen Materialen über das Verhalten des kleinsten Lebens
in den Oceanen und den grössten bisher zugänglichen Tiefen des Weltmeers’. Ibid., pp. 182–207.
1845c. ‘Untersuchungen über die kleinsten Lebensformen in Quellenlande des Euphrats und Araxes, so wie
über eine an neuen Formen sehr reiche marine Tripelbildung von den Bermudainseln’. Ibid., pp. 253–275,
pl. 1.
1846. ‘Neue Untersuchungen über das kleinste Leben als geologisches Moment’. Ibid., 1845, pp. 53–87.
1849a. ‘Ueber die in dem Magen eines peruanischen Flussfisches als Speise gefundene mikroskopische
Organismen’. Ibid., 1848, pp. 1–5.
1849b. ‘Passatstaub und Blutregen. Ein grosses organisches unsichtbares Wirken und Leben in der
Atmosphäre’. Phys. Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1847, pp. 269–460, pls. 1–6. (Résumé in Silliman’s
Amer. Jour., vol. 9, 1850.)
1854. ‘Mikrogeologie. Das Erden und Felsen schaffenden Wirken des unsichtbar kleinen selbständigen
Lebens auf der Erde’. Leipzig, Leopold Voss. Vol. I, text, xxviii + 374 pp. Vol. II, atlas, 31 pp., 40 pls.
with explanatory leaves.
FORTI, A.
1922. ‘Ricerche su la flora pelagica (fitoplankton) di Quarto dei Mille (Mare Ligure)’. R. Comit. talass. Ital.
Lab. Mar. di quarto dei Mille Presso Genova, Mem. 97, 248 pp., 13 pls.
FRITSCH, F. E.
1935. ‘The structure and reproduction of the Algae. Vol. I, Class IV’. Bacilariophyceae, pp. 564–651.
NewYork, TheMacmillan Co.; Cambridge, England, The University Press.
GILLAM, A. E., EL RIDI, M. S., and WIMPENNY, R. S.
1939. ‘The seasonal variation in biological composition of certain plankton samples from the North Sea in
relation to their content of vitamin A, carotenoids, chlorophyll, and total fatty matter’. Jour. Exper. Biol.,
vol. 16, pp. 71–88, 7 figs.
GOUGH, L. H.
1905. ‘Report on the plankton of the English Channel in 1903’. North Sea Fish. Invest. Comm. Rep. No. 2,
South. Area, on Fish. and Hydrog. Invest. in the North Sea and Adjacent Waters, 1902–03. Rep. No. 2,
pp. 325–377, charts 1–16, figs. 1–7.
214
GRAN, H. H.
1931. ‘Plankton diatoms of Puget Sound’. Publ. Puget Sound Biol. Sta., Univ. Wash., vol. 7, pp. 417–519,
95 figs.
GRAN, H. H., and YENDO, K.
1914. ‘Japanese Diatoms. I. On Chaetoceras. II. On Stephanopyxis’. Vidensk. Skrifter. I. Mat.-Naturv. Kl.
1913, no. 8, pp. 1–29, 16 figs. Christiania.
GRAY, S. F.
1821. ‘A natural arrangement of British plants according to their relations to each other’. London, Printed
for Baldwin, Cradock and Joy. 2 vols. Diatomaceae, vol. 1, pp. 293–295.
GREGORY, W.
1856–57. ‘On the post-tertiary diatomaceous sand of Glenshira. Part II. Containing an account of a number
of additional undescribed species’. Trans. Micr. Soc. London, N.S., vol. 4, pp. 35–48, pl. 5, 1856; vol. 5,
pp. 67–88, pl. 1, 1857.
1857. ‘On new forms of marine Diatomaceae, found in the Firth of Clyde and in Loch Fyne, illustrated by
numerous figures drawn by R. K. Greville, LL.D., F.R.S.E’. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, vol. 21, pp.
473–542, pls. 9–14.
GREVILLE, R. K.
1859. ‘Descriptions of Diatomaceae observed in Californian guano’. Trans. Bot. Soc. Edinburgh, vol. 6, pl.
5; and Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci., vol. 7, pp. 155–166, pls. 7–8.
1865a. ‘Descriptions of new and rare diatoms. Ser. XIV–XVII’. Trans. Micr. Soc. London, N.S., vol. 13,
pp. 1–10, 24–34, 43–75, 97–105, pls. 1–6 and 8–9.
1865b. ‘Descriptions of new genera and species of diatoms from Hongkong’. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. III,
vol. 16, pp. 1–7, pl. 5.
215
1866. ‘Descriptions of new and rare diatoms. Ser. XVIII–XX’. Trans. Micr. Soc. London, N.S., vol. 14, pp.
1–9, 77–86, 121–130, pls. 1, 2, 8, 9, 11, and 12.
GROSS, F.
1937. ‘The life history of some marine plankton diatoms’. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., London, B, vol. 228, pp.
1–47.
1940a. ‘The development of isolated resting spores into auxospores in Ditylum brightwelli (West)’. Mar.
Biol. Assn. U.K., Jour., vol. 24, pp. 375–380, 2 figs.
1940b. ‘The osmotic relations of the plankton diatom Ditylum brightwelli (West)’. Ibid., pp. 381–415, 22
figs.
GRUNOW, ALBERT
1863. ‘Ueber einige neue und ungenügend bekannte Arten und Gattungeu von Diatomaceen’. Verh. Zool.-
Bot. Ges. Wien, vol. 13, pp. 137–162, pls. 4–5.
1867. ‘Reise seiner Majestät Fregatte “Novara” um die Erde’. Botanischer Theil, vol. 1, Algen. 104 pp., 11
pls.
1878. ‘Algen und Diatomaceen aus dem Kaspischen Meere. In Dr. O. Schneider’s Naturwissen’. Beitr. zur
Kenntniss der Kaukasusländer, auf Grund seiner Sammelbeute. Dresden. 160 pp., 5 pls.
1881. ‘Ueber die Arten der Gattung Grammatophora mit Bezug auf die Tafeln LIII und LIII B, in Van
Heurck’s Synopsis der belgischen Diatomeen’. Beil. Bot. Centralbl., vol. 7, pp. 1–15.
1884. ‘Die Diatomeen von Franz Josefs-Land’. Denkschr. Kais. Akad. Wissensch. Math.-Naturw. Kl., vol.
48, pp. 53–112, pls. 1–5. Wien.
HAECKEL, E.
1890. ‘Planktonstudien’. Jena. (English translation in Rep. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1893. For 1889–1891.)
HARVEY, H. W.
1926. ‘Nitrate in the sea’. I. Mar. Biol. Assn. U.K., Jour., vol. 14, pp. 71–88.
1928. ‘Nitrate in the sea. II’. Ibid., vol. 15, pp. 183–190.
1933. ‘On the rate of diatom growth’. Ibid., vol. 19, pp. 253–276, 3 figs.
1934a. ‘Measurement of phytoplankton populations’. Ibid., pp. 761–773.
1934b. ‘Annual variation of planktonic vegetation, 1933’. Ibid., pp. 775–792, 5 figs.
1937. ‘The supply of iron to diatoms’. Ibid., vol. 22, pp. 205–219.
1939. ‘Substances controlling the growth of a diatom’. Ibid., vol. 23, pp. 499–520.
1940. ‘Nitrogen and phosphorus required for the growth of phytoplankton’. Ibid., vol. 24, pp. 115–123, 2
figs.
HARVEY, H. W., COOPER, L. H. N., LEBOUR, M. V., and RUSSELL, F. S.
1935. ‘Plankton production and its control’. Mar. Biol. Assn. U.K., Jour., vol. 20, pp. 407–441, 16 figs.
HASSALL, A. H.
1845. ‘A history of the British freshwater algae, including descriptions of the Desmideae and Diatomaceae
with upwards of one hundred plates illustrating the various species. London’. Diatomaceae: vol. 1, pp.
395–439; vol. 2, pp. 21–24, pls. 93–102.
1855. ‘The Diatomaceae in the water supplied to the inhabitants of London’. Microscopic examination of
the water. London.
216
HENSEN, V.
1887. ‘Ueber die Bestimmung des Plankton. 5. Bericht der Kommission zur wissenschaftlichen Unter-
suchung der deutschen Meere bei Kiel für die Jahre 1882–86’. Kiel.
HERDMAN, W. A.
1923. ‘Founders of oceanography’. London, Edward Arnold & Co. 340 pp.
HOLMAN, R. M., and ROBBINS, W. W.
1939. A textbook of general botany. 4thed. NewYork, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. xvii + 664 pp.
HUSTEDT, F.
1930–37. ‘Die Kieselalgen Deutschlands, Oesterreichs und der Schweiz mit Berücksichtigung der übrigen
Länder Europas sowie der angrenzenden Meeresgebiete. Vol. 7 in Dr. L. Rabenhorst’s Kryptogamen-
Flora von Deutschland, Oesterreich und der Schweiz’. Leipzig. Part I, secs. 1–5, 1930, xii + 920 pp.,
542 figs. Part II, 1931—(not yet completed): sec. 1, 1931, pp. 1–176, figs. 543–682; sec. 2, 1932, pp.
177–320, figs. 683–780; sec. 3, 1933, pp. 321–432, figs. 781–880; sec. 4, 1933, pp. 433–576, figs.
881–1008; sec. 5, 1937, pp. 577–736, figs. 1009–1105.
IKARI, JIRO
1927. ‘On Bacteriastrum of Japan’. Bot. Mag. Tokyo, vol. 41, no. 486, pp. 421–432, 9 figs.
JOHNSTONE, JAMES
1908. Conditions of life in the sea. Cambridge, Cambridge University Press. xiv + 332 pp., frontispiece
(chart), 31 figs.
JØRGENSEN, E.
1905. ‘Hydrographical and biological investigations in Norwegian flords by O. Nordgaard’. The protist
plankton of northern Norwegian fiords (winter and spring, 1899, 1900), pls. 6–18; and diatoms in bottom
samples from Lofoten and Vesteraalen by E. Jrgensen. Bergens Museums Skrifter 7, 1905. 225 pp.
Bergen.
KARSTEN, GEORGE
1869. Notes on New York diatoms with descriptions of a new species, Fragilaria crotonensis Kitt. Sci.
Gossip, vol. 5, p. 109, 3 figs.
KOHL, F. G.
1902. ‘Untersuchungen über das Carotin und seine physiologische Bedeutung in den Pfianzen’. Leipzig.
165 pp.
1906. ‘Die Farbstoffe der Diatomeen-Chromatophoren’. Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., vol. 24, pp. 124–134.
KÜTZING, F. T.
1844. ‘Die kieselschaligen Bacillarien oder Diatomeen’. Nordhausen, W. Köhne. 152 pp., 29 pls. 2ded.,
Nordhausen, 1865.
1849. ‘Species algarum’. Lipsiae, F. A. Brockhaus. vi + 922 pp.
217
LAUDER, H. S.
1864. ‘Remarks on the marine Diatomaceae found at Hong Kong, with descriptions of new species’. Trans.
Micr. Soc. London, N.S., vol. 12, pp. 75–79, pl. 8.
LAUTERBORN, ROBERT
1896. ‘Untersuchungen über Bau, Kernteilung, und Bewegung der Diatomeen’. Leipzig, Wilhelm Engel-
mann. 165 pp., 150 figs.
LE BLANC, RENÉE
1935. ‘Sur quelques Chaetoceros de l’Etang de Thau. Acad. Sci., C.R.’, vol. 201, pp. 1139–1140, 6 figs.
Paris.
LEBOUR, M. V.
1921. ‘The food of young clupeoids’. Mar. Biol. Assn. U.K., Jour., vol. 12, pp. 458–467.
1922. ‘The food of plankton organisms’. Ibid., pp. 644–677.
1923. ‘The food of plankton organisms. II’. Ibid., vol. 13, pp. 70–92.
1930. ‘The planktonic diatoms of northern seas’. London, printed for the Ray Society. ix + 244 pp., 181
figs., 4 pls.
LEUDUGER-FORTMOREL, G.
1892. ‘Diatomées de la Malaisie’. Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg, vol. 11, pp. 1–60, pls. 1–7.
LIEBISCH, W.
1928. ‘Amphitetras antediluviana Ehrbg., sowie einige Beiträge zum Bau und zur Entwicklung der
Diatomeenzelle. Zeitschr. Bot.’, vol. 20, pp. 225–271.
1929. ‘Experimentelle und kritische Untersuchungen über die Pektinmembran der Diatomeen, usw’. Ibid.,
vol. 22, pp. 1–65.
LINNÉ, C. V.
1911. ‘Ueber das Nannoplankton und die Zentrifugierung kleinster Wasserproben zur Gewinnung desselben
im lebenden Zustande’. Internat. Revue Gesamten Hydrobiologie, vol. 4, pp. 1–38.
LUCAS, C. C., and HUTCHINSON, A. H.
1927. ‘A bio-hydrographical investigation of the sea adjacent to the Fraser River mouth’. Trans. Roy. Soc.
Canada, vol. 21, pt. 2, sec. 5, 520 pp., 37 figs., 5 pls.
LYNGBYE, H. C.
1819. ‘Tentamen hydrophytologiae danicae, continens omnia hydrophyta cryptogama Daniae, Holsatiae,
Faeroae, Islandiae, Groenlandiae hucusque cognita, systematice disposita, descripta et iconibus illustrata,
adjectis simul speciebus norvegicis’. Hafniae, Typis Schultzianis. xxxii + 248 pp., 70 col. pls.
MANGIN, L.
1908. ‘Observations sur les Diatomées’. Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot. IX, vol. 8, pp. 177–219. Also in Acad. Sci.,
C.R., vol. 146, pp. 770–773. Paris.
1910. ‘Sur quelques algues nouvelles ou peu eonnues du Phytoplankton de l’Atlantique’. Bull. Soc. Bot.
France, vol. 57. Paris.
1917. ‘Sur le Chaetoceros criophilus Castr., espèce caractèristique des mers antarctiques’. Acad. Sci., C.R.,
vol. 164, pp. 704–709, 4 figs. Paris.
MANN, ALBERT
1905. ‘Diatoms, the jewels of the plant world’. Smithson. Miscell. Collection (vol. 48). Vol. 3, Quarterly
Issue, pt. 1, pp. 50–58, pls. 22–25.
1907. ‘Report on the diatoms of the “Albatross” voyages in the Pacific Ocean, 1888–1904’. Contrib. U.S.
Nat. Herb., vol. 10, pt. 5, pp. 220–419, pls. 44–54. Smithson. Inst., U.S. Nat. Mus. Washington.
1922. ‘Suggestions for collecting and preparing diatoms’. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., no. 2410, vol. 60, art. 15,
pp. 1–8.
218
1927. ‘The relation of the plankton to some chemical and physical factors in the Clyde Sea area’. Mar. Biol.
Assn. U.K., Jour., vol. 14, pp. 837–868, 9 figs., 10 pls.
1930. ‘A study of the spring diatom increase in Loch Striven’. Ibid., vol. 16, pp. 853–878, 15 figs.
MERESCHKOWSKY, C.
1901. ‘Etudes sur l’endochrome des Diatomées’. Mém. Acad. Imp. St. Pétersb., sér. 8, vol. 11.
MEUNIER, A.
1910. ‘Microplankton des Mers de Barents et de Kara. Duc d’Orléans, Campagne Arctique de 1907’.
Brussels. 2 vols. Text, 355 pp.; Atlas, 36 pls. with explanatory leaves.
1913. ‘Microplankton de la Mer Flamande. Ire Partie: Le genre Chaetoceros Ehrg’. Mém. Mus. R. Hist.
Nat. Belgique, vol. 7, pp. 1–55, pls. 1–7. Brussels.
MEYER, A.
1904. ‘Orientierende Untersuchungen über Verbreitung, Morphologie und Chemie des Volutins’. Bot. Zeit.,
vol. 62.
MILLS, F. W.
1933–34. ‘An index to the genera and species of the Diatomaceae and their synonyms. 1816–1932’. London,
Wheldon & Wesley, Ltd. 3 vols. 1726 pp.
MOBERG, E. G.
1928. ‘The interrelation between diatoms, their chemical environment, and upwelling water in the sea, off
the coast of southern California’. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci., vol. 14, pp. 511–518.
MOLISCH, H.
1905. ‘Ueber den braunen Farbstoff der Phaeophyceen und Diatomeen’. Bot. Zeit., vol. 63, pp. 131–144.
MÜLLER, O. F.
1783. ‘Strand-parlebandet och Armbandet, tvanne, Microscopiska Strand-våxter’. Kongl. Vet. Acad.
Handl., vol. 4, pp. 80–85. Stockholm.
NÄGELI, CARL
1849. ‘Die neueren Algen-systeme und Versuch zur Begründung eines eigenen Systems der Algen und
Florideen’. Zürich.
NATHANSOHN, ALEXANDER
1906. ‘Ueber die Bedeutung vertikaler Wasserwebungen für die Produktion des Planktons im Meere’. Abh.
Math.-Phys. Klasse König. Sächsischen Gess. Wiss., vol. 29, pp. 355–441.
NEBELUNG, HANS
1878. ‘Spektroskopische Untersuchungen der Farbstoffe einiger Süsswasser-algen’. Bot. Zeit., vol. 36, pp.
369–382, 385–399, 401–423.
NELSON, E. W.
1920. ‘On the occurrence of diatoms on the skin of whales. (Cocconeis ceticola.)’ Proc. Roy. Soc. Bot.,
vol. 91, p. 210.
O’MEARA, E.
1871. ‘On some new species of the genus Amphiprora’. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci., N.S., vol. 11, p. 21, pl. 1.
219
OSTENFELD, C. H.
1899. ‘Plankton in 1898. Iagttagelser over Overfladevandets Temperatur, Saltholdighed og Plankton paa
islandske og grölandske Skibsrouter i 1898, udgivne af Martin Knudsen og C’. Ostenfeld. Copenhagen.
1901. ‘Phytoplankton fra det Kaspide Hav’. Vidensk. Meddel. naturh. Foren., pp. 129–139. Copenhagen.
1902. ‘Marine plankton diatoms’. Johs. Schmidt: Flora of Koh Chang. Part 7. (Reprinted from Botanisk.
Tidsskrift, vol. 25, pp. 1–49.) Copenhagen.
1903. ‘Phytoplankton from the sea around the Faeroes. Botany of the Faeroes’, vol. 2. Copenhagen.
PALMER, L. S.
1922. Carotinoids and related pigments. The chromolipoids. American Chemical Society Monograph
Series. New York, The Chemical Catalog Co., Inc. 316 pp.
PASCHER, A.
1914. ‘Ueber Flagellaten und Algen’. Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., vol. 32, pp. 136–160, 430.
1921. ‘Ueber die Uebereinstimmung zwischen den Diatomeen, Heterokonten und Chrysomonaden’. Ibid.,
vol. 39, pp. 236–248.
1931. ‘Systematische Uebersicht über die mit Flagellaten in Zusammenhang stehenden Algenreihen, usw’.
Beih. Bot. Centralbl., vol. 48, pp. 317–332.
PAVILLARD, J.
1911. ‘Observations sur les Diatomées’. Bull. Soc. Bot. France, vol. 58, pp. 21–29, 2 figs. Paris.
1913. ‘Observations sur les Diatomées, 2e série’. Ibid., vol. 60, pp. 126–133, 2 figs.
1916a. ‘Recherches sur les Diatomées pélagiques du Golfe du Lion. Travail de l’Institut de Botanique de
l’Université de Montpellier et de la Station Zoologique do Cette’. Série Mixte. Mém. no. 5. 63 pp., 2 pls.
1916b. ‘Flagellés nouveaux, épiphytes des Diatomées pélagiques’. Acad. Sci., C.R., vol. 163, pp. 65–68.
1925. Bacillariales. Report on the Danish Oceanographical Expeditions 1908–10 to the Mediterranean and
Adjacent Seas. Vol. 2, Biology, J. 4. 72 pp., 116 figs.
PÉRAGALLO, H.
1888. ‘Diatomées de la baie de Villefranche (Alpes-Maritimes)’. Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Toulouse, vol. 22,
pp. 13–100, pls. 1–6. (Reprinted under the title of “Diatomées du Midi de la France,” pp. 1–100, pls.
1–6. Toulouse, 1888.)
1892. ‘Monographie du Rhizosolenia et de quelques genres voisins’. Le Diatomiste, vol. 1, pp. 79–82,
99–117, pls. 13–15, 17–18. Paris.
PÉRAGALLO, H. and M.
1897–1908. ‘Diatomées marines de France et des districts maritimes voisins’. M. J. Tempère, Grez-sur-
Loing. 540 pp.; Atlas, 137 pls.
PHIFER, L. D.
1933. ‘Seasonal distribution and occurrence of planktonic diatoms at Friday Harbor, Washington’. Univ.
Wash. Publ. Oceanog., vol. 1, pp. 39–81.
PRITCHARD, ANDREW
1861. ‘A history of Infusoria, including the Desmidiaceae and Diatomaceae, British and foreign’. London,
Whittaker & Co. Ed.1, 1842. Reprinted in 1845 and 1849 (1849 reprint was called ed. 2). Ed. 4, enlarged
and revised, 1861. xii + 968 pp., 40 pls.
QUEKETT, JOHN
RALFS, JOHN
1864. ‘Remarks on the marine Diatomaceae found at Hong Kong, with descriptions of new species. By
Henry Scott Lauder, Assistant-Surgeon, Royal Navy; with notes by J. Ralfs’, Esq. Trans. Micr. Soc.
London, N.S., vol. 12, pp. 75–79, pl. 8.
ROPER, F. C. S.
1858. ‘Notes on some new species and varieties of British marine Diatomaceae’. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci.,
vol. 6, pp. 17–25, pl. 3.
SCHMIDT, ADOLF
1874. ‘Die in den Grundproben der Nordseefahrt vom 21. Juli bis 9 Sept. 1872, enthaltenen Diatomaceen’.
Jahresber. Komm. Untersuch. deutsch. Meere in Kiel, Jahre 1872–73, vol. 2, pp. 81–96, pls. 1–3. Berlin.
1875–82. ‘Atlas der Diatomaceenkunde, in Verbindung mit den Herren Grundler, Grunow, Janisch,
Weissflog und Witt, herausgegeben von Adolf Schmidt, archidiaconus in Aschersleben’. Aschersleben,
Ernst Schlegel. Heft 1–36, 144 pls.
1885–1937. ‘Atlas der Diatomaceenkunde. First three series reissued in 1885’. Zweite revidirte Auflage.
Last plate issued to date, pl. 416, in August, 1937, by F. Hustedt, Heft 104.
SCHNEIDER, OSCAR
1878. ‘Naturwissenschaftliche Beiträge zur Kenntniss der Kaukasusländer, auf Grund seiner Sammelbeute’.
Dresden, E. Blockmann und Sohn. 160 pp., 5 pls.
SCHREIBER, E.
1927. ‘Die Reinkultur von marinem Phytoplankton und deren Bedeutung für die Erforschung der Produk-
tionfähigkeit des Meerwassers’. Wiss. Meeresunters., Abt. Helgoland, N.F., vol. 16, pp. 1–34.
SCHRÖDER, BRUNO
1900. ‘Das Phytoplankton des Golfes von Neapel’. Mitt. Zool. Sta. Neapel, vol. 14. Berlin.
1906. ‘Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Phytoplanktons warmer Meere’. Vierteljahrschr. naturforsch. Ges. Zürich,
vol. 51, pp. 319–377, 46 figs.
SCHULTZE, M. S.
1858. ‘Innere Bewegungserscheinungen bei Diatomeen der Nordsee aus den Gattungen Coscinodiscus,
Denticella, Rhizosolenia’. Müller’s Archiv Anat., Phys. u. wissensch. Med., 1858, p. 330, pl. 13.
Translation: Phenomena of internal movements in Diatomaceae of the North Sea, belonging to the genera
Coscinodiscus, Denticella, and Rhizosolenia. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci., N.S., vol. 7, pp. 13–21, pl. 2. 1859.
SCHÜTT, F.
1854. ‘A short description of some new forms of Diatomaceae from Port Natal’. Trans. Micr. Soc. London,
N.S., vol. 2, pp. 13–18, pl. 1.
SHRUBSOLE, W. H.
1890. ‘On a new diatom from the estuary of the Thames’. Jour. Quek. Micr. Club, ser. 2, vol. 4, pp.
259–262, pl. 13.
SMITH, WILLIAM
1852. Notes on the Diatomaceae; with descriptions of British species included in the genus Pleurosigma. Ann.
Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. II, vol. 9, pp. 1–12, pls. 1–2.
221
1853–56. ‘A synopsis of the British Diatomaceae; with remarks on their structure, functions and distribution;
and instructions for collecting and preserving specimens’. Plates by Tuffen West. London, Smith and
Beck. Vol. I, xxxiv + 89 pp., 31 pls., 1853. Vol. II, xxx + 107 pp., pls. 32–42, A-E, 1856.
TAMMES, TINE
1900. ‘Ueber die Verbreitung des Carotins im Pfianzenreiche’. Flora, vol. 87, pp. 205–247.
TAYLOR, F. B.
1929. ‘Notes on diatoms. An introduction to the study of the Diatomaceae’. Bournemouth, England. 269
pp.
TURPIN, P. J. F.
1828. ‘Observations sur le nouveau genre Surirella’. Mém. Mus. Hist. Nat., vol. 16, pp. 361–368, pl. 15.
VAN HEUROK, HENRI
1880–85. ‘Synopsis des Diatomées de Belgique’. Anvers. Edité par l’auteur. 2 vols., text and atlas. Atlas,
132 pls. with descriptive leaves and 3 supplementary pls., 1880–1881. Table alphabétique des noms
génériques et spécifiques et des Synonymes contenus dans l’Atlas, 120 pp., 1884. Texte, 235 pp., 1885.
1896. ‘A treatise on the Diatomaceae’. Translated by Wynne E. Baxter. London, Printed by W. E. Baxter,
Ltd. Pp. xx + 559, 35 pls., 291 text figs.
WALLICH, G. C.
1860. ‘On the siliceous organisms found in the digestive cavities of Salpae, and their relation to the flint
nodules of the chalk formation’. Trans. Micr. Soc. London, N.S., vol. 8, pp. 36–55, pl. 2.
WEST, G. S.
1860. ‘Remarks on some Diatomaceae, new or imperfectly described, and a new desmid’. Trans. Micr. Soc.
London, N.S., vol. 8, pp. 147–153, pl. 7.
WOLLE, F.
1894. ‘Diatomaceae of North America, illustrated with twenty-three hundred figures from the author’s
drawings on one hundred and twelve plates’. Bethlehem, Pa., The Comenius Press. Pp. i-xiii + 15–47,
112 pls. with explanatory leaves.
ZOBELL, C. E.
1935. ‘The assimilation of ammonium nitrogen by Nitzschia closterium and other marine phytoplankton’.
Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci., vol. 21, pp. 517–522.
ZOPF, WILHELM
1900. ‘Ueber das Polycystin, ein krystallisirendes Carotin aus Polycystis flos aguae Wittr’. Ber. Deutsch.
Bot. Ges., vol. 18, pp. 461–467.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES
[Short line below each figure represents the measurement of
10 microns. All photographs by the author.]
PLATE 1
Fig. 1. Coscinodiscus excentricus Ehr. Diameter, 67µ.
Fig. 2. Coscinodiscus curvatulus Grun. Diameter, 53µ.
Fig. 3. Coscinodiscus marginatus Ehr.
a. Entire valve. Low magnification. Diameter, 53µ.
b. Same cell as in (a) more highly magnified to show structure.
Note poroid outer closing membrane.
c. Focus slightly lower than in (b). Note arrangement of areolae.
d. Focus lower than in (c) to show structure of margin.
Fig. 4. Coscinodiscus radiatus Ehr. Diameter, 47µ.
224
225
PLATE 2
Coscinodiscus centralis var. pacifica Gran and Angst
Fig. 1. Entire valve. Diameter, 260µ.
Fig. 2. Section of valve more highly magnified to show arrangement of areolae.
Fig. 3. Center rosette. Note poroid outer membrane.
Fig. 4. Section of valve near margin. Note poroid outer membrane.
226
227
PLATE 3
Fig. 1. Coscinodiscus perforatus var. cellulosa Grun.
a. Entire valve. Diameter, 95µ.
b. Section of valve more highly magnified to show arrangement of areolae.
Note poroid outer membrane and interstitial meshes.
Fig. 2. Coscinodiscus oculus iridis Ehr.
a. Entire valve. Diameter, 138µ
b. Center of valve more highly magnified.
228
229
PLATE 4
Fig. 1. Arachnoidiscus ehrenbergii Bail
a. Entire valve. Diameter, 390µ.
b. Section of same cell more highly magnified. Inner side of valve.
Fig. 2. Aulacodiscus kittoni Arn.
a. Entire valve. Diameter, 70µ.
b. Same valve as in (a) more highly magnified.
230
231
PLATE 5
Fig. 1. Actinoptychus undulatus (Bail.) Ralfs
a and b. Same valve with opposite sets of sectors in focus. In (a) note processes
at center of margin of sectors in focus. Diameter, 58µ.
Fig. 2. Actinoptychus splendens (Shad.) Ralfs
a. Entire valve. Diameter, 85µ. Focused to show hyaline bracket-shaped
region near margin of alternate sectors.
b. Section of same valve. Same focus as in (a) but more highly magnified.
c. Same valve. Focused to show hyaline line running from spatulate process
toward inner end of alternate sectors.
d. Same focus as in (c) but more highly magnified.
232
233
INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES
235
236
Chaetoceros Ehr. Grammatophora Ehr., 173
peruvianus form gracilis (Schröd.) Hust. angulosa Ehr. (fig. 124), 174
(fig. 68, d-f), 114 marina (Lyng.) Kütz. (fig. 125-A), 174
pseudocurvisetus Mang. (fig. 94), 138 marina var. adriatica Grun. (fig. 125-B), 174
radicans Schütt (fig. 97), 141 oceanica (Ehr.) Grun. (fig. 126), 176
seiracanthus Gran (fig. 84), 131
similis Cl. (fig. 90), 135 Guinardia H. Pér., 78
flaccida (Castr.) H. Pér. (fig. 40), 78
socialis Laud. (fig. 100), 143
subsecundus (Grun.) Hust. (fig. 83), 130 Gyrosigma Has., 194
teres Cl. (fig. 72), 118
spencerii (Quek.) Cl. (fig. 144), 194
tetrastichon Cl. (fig. 63), 108
tortissimus Gran (fig. 99), 142
vanheurcki Gran (fig. 77), 123 Hemiaulus Ehr., 168
vistulae Apstein (fig. 102), 144 hauckii Grun. (fig. 118), 168
wighami Brightw. (fig. 91), 136 membranaceus Cl. (fig. 120), 170
sinensis Grev. (fig. 119), 168
Climacodium Grun., 146
frauenfeldianum Grun. (fig. 105), 147 Hemidiscus Wall., 170
cuneiformis var. ventricosa (Castr.) Hust.
Climacosphenia Ehr., 177 (fig. 121), 170
moniligera Ehr. (fig. 128), 178
Isthmia Ag., 166
Corethron Castr., 70 nervosa Kütz. (fig. 116), 166
hystrix Hen. (figs. 34-A, 34-B, 34-C), 70
Coscinodiscus Ehr., 49 Lauderia Cl., 74
centralis var. pacifica Gran and Angst borealis Gran (fig. 35), 74
(fig. 24; pl. 2), 60
concinnus W. Sm. (fig. 22), 58 Leptocylindrus Cl., 77
curvatulus Grun. (fig. 17; pl. 1, fig. 2), 55 danicus Cl. (fig. 39), 78
excentricus Ehr. (fig. 14; pl. 1, fig. 1), 52
granii Gough (fig. 21), 56 Licmophora Ag., 176
lineatus Ehr. (fig. 15), 53 abbreviata Ag. (fig. 127), 177
marginatus Ehr. (fig. 19; pl. 1, fig. 3), 55
nitidus Greg. (fig. 18), 55 Lithodesmium Ehr., 150
oculus iridis Ehr. (fig. 26; pl. 3, fig. 2), 62 undulatum Ehr. (fig. 108), 150
perforatus var. cellulosa Grun. (fig. 25-A; pl. 3, Melosira Ag., 39
fig. 1), 61 moniliformis (Müll.) Ag. (fig. 1), 39
perforatus var. pavillardi (Forti) Hust.
sulcata (Ehr.) Kütz. (fig. 2), 40
(fig. 25-B), 62
radiatus Ehr. (fig. 20; pl. 1, fig. 4), 56 Navicula Bory, 192
stellaris Rop. (fig. 16), 53 distans (W.Sm.) Ralfs (fig. 143), 193
wailesii Gran and Angst (fig. 23), 58 membranacea Cl. (fig. 142), 193
Nitzschia Has., 199
Coscinosira Gran, 44 bilobata. var. minor Grun. (fig. 152), 200
polychorda Gran (fig. 7), 44
closterium (Ehr.) W. Sm. (fig. 153), 200
Dactyliosolen Castr., 76 delicatissima Cl. (fig. 158), 204
antarcticus Castr. (fig. 37), 76 longissima (Bréb.) Ralfs (fig. 154), 200
mediterraneus H. Pér. (fig. 38), 77 pacifica Cupp (fig. 157), 204
Ditylum Bail., 148 paradoxa (Gmel.) Grun. (fig. 159), 206
brightwellii (west) Grun. (figs. 107-A, 107-B), 148 pungens var. atlantica Cl. (fig. 156), 202
seriata Cl. (fig. 155), 201
Eucampia Ehr., 145
cornuta (Cl.) Grun. (fig. 104), 146 Plagiogramma Grev., 179
zoodiacus Ehr. (fig. 103), 145 vanheurckii Grun. (fig. 129), 180
Fragilaria Lyng., 180 Planktoniella Schütt, 63
crotonensis Kit. (fig. 131), 181 sol (Wall.) Schütt (fig. 27), 63
237